User Manual
Software version F5
D13354.07
June 2006
This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
Trademarks and Copyright
All rights reserved. This document contains information that is proprietary to TANDBERG. No part
of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of TANDBERG. Nationally and internationally recognized trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Third Party Software
Amended / Expanded Copyright notices for third-party software on the TANDBERG MXP systems
are listed below:
Full copies of the licenses and warranty statements are located on the product CD in the the
license files directory.
The non-commercial third party code is distributed in binary form under the terms of non-copyleft
style open source licenses such as BSD, Artistic or MIT/X Consortium.
The product also has some binary code distributed under the terms of the GNU public license
with an exemption which allows static links to non-copyleft commercial code.
In accordance with section (3) of the GNU General Public License, copies of such code will be
provided upon request by contacting TANDBERG. Please contact us by using the Online Support
10.00 for media and shipping.
Agfa
Contains iType™ from Monotype Imaging Corporation.
CMU-SNMP
Copyright 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved
CMU-SNMP is distributed under the terms of the CMU SNMP license, which is an open source license similar to a BSD or
X Consortium License.
Dropbear - an SSH2 server
Copyright (c) 2002,2003 Matt Johnston All rights reserved.
The Dropbear SSH2 server is distributed under the terms of the Dropbear License, which is a MIT/X Consortium style
open source license.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
eCos
eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 John Dallaway
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Nick Garnett
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Jonathan Larmour Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Andrew Lunn Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Gary
Thomas Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Bart Veer
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
(c) UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone
and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. * All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000 Brian Somers <brian@Awfulhak.org>
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. * All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997 Niklas Hallqvist. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Stephen Deering of Stanford University.
Portions of eCos code are distributed under several BSD style licenses. Other portions of eCos code are distributed under
the terms of the GNU General Public License with a non-copyleft exception which allows static links to non-copyleft
programs.
ExPat XML Parser:
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
The ExPat XML parser is distributed under the terms of the ExPat License which is a MIT/X Consortium style open
source license
ICU
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 Copyright (c) 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All rights
reserved.
ICU is distributed under the terms of the ICU license, which is a MIT/X Consortium style license.
OpenSSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
OpenSSL is distributed under the terms of the OpenSSL and SSLeay licenses, which are both BSD style open source
licenses.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
snprintf
Snprintf is distributed under the terms of the snprintf license, which is a Frontier Artistic style open source license.
A standard copy of snprintf can be located at the author’s web site: http://www.ijs.si/software/snprintf/
xSupplicant (wpa_supplicant) 802.1x
Copyright (c) 2002-2005, Jouni Malinen jkmaline@cc.hut.fi
xSupplicant is distributed under the terms of the xSupplicant license, which is a BSD style open source license.
Disclaimer
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to
change without prior notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by TANDBERG. The
information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable; however TANDBERG
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
document, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its
use. No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of TANDBERG.
This document was written by the Research and Development Department of TANDBERG,
Norway. We are committed to maintain a high level of quality in all our documentation. Towards
and structure of this document.
Patent information
TANDBERG technology described in this manual is protected by one or more of the following
U.S. Patent No. 5,584,077 - 5,838,664 - 5,600,646 - 7,010,119 - 7,034,860 and other patents are
pending in the United States and/or other countries.
COPYRIGHT © 2005–2006, TANDBERG
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Environmental Issues
Thank you for buying a product which contributes to a reduction in pollution, and thereby helps
save the environment. Our products reduce the need for travel and transport and thereby reduce
pollution. Our products have either none or few consumable parts (chemicals, toner, gas, paper).
Our products are low energy consuming products.
TANDBERG’s Environmental Policy
Environmental stewardship is important to TANDBERG’s culture. As a global company with
strong corporate values, TANDBERG is committed to being an environmental leader and
embracing technologies that help companies, individuals and communities creatively address
environmental challenges.
TANDBERG’s environmental objectives are to:
•
Develop products that reduce energy consumption, CO2 emissions, and traffic congestion
•
•
•
Provide products and services that improve quality of life for our customers
Produce products that can be recycled or disposed of safely at the end of product life
Comply with all relevant environmental legislation.
European Environmental Directives
As a manufacturer of electrical and electronic equipment TANDBERG is responsible for
compliance with the requirements in the European Directives 2002/96/EC (WEEE) and
2002/95/EC (RoHS).
The primary aim of the WEEE Directive and RoHS Directive is to reduce the impact of disposal of
electrical and electronic equipment at end-of-life. The WEEE Directive aims to reduce the amount
of WEEE sent for disposal to landfill or incineration by requiring producers to arrange for
collection and recycling. The RoHS Directive bans the use of certain heavy metals and
brominates flame retardants to reduce the environmental impact of WEEE which is land filled or
incinerated.
TANDBERG has implemented necessary process changes to comply with the European RoHS
Directive (2002/95/EC) and the European WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC).
Waste Handling
In order to avoid the dissemination of hazardous substances in our
environment and to diminish the pressure on natural resources, we
encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems in your area.
Those systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of your end
of life equipment in a sound way.
TANDBERG products put on the market after August 2005 are
marked with a crossed-out wheelie bin symbol that invites you to use
those take-back systems.
Please contact your local supplier, the regional waste administration or
http://www.tandberg.net/recycling if you need more information on the collection and recycling
system in your area.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
Information for Recyclers
As part of compliance with the European WEEE Directive, TANDBERG provides recycling
information on request for all types of new equipment put on the market in Europe after August
13th 2005.
product for which you would like to receive recycling information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Model number of TANDBERG product
Your company’s name
Contact name
Address
Telephone number
E-mail address
Digital User Guides
TANDBERG is pleased to announce that we have replaced the printed versions of our User
Guides with a digital CD version. Instead of a range of different user manuals, there is now one
CD – which can be used with all TANDBERG products – in a variety of languages. The
environmental benefits of this are significant. The CDs are recyclable and the savings on paper
are huge. A simple web-based search feature helps you directly access the information you need.
In addition, the TANDBERG video systems now have an intuitive on-screen help function, which
provides a range of useful features and tips. The contents of the CD can still be printed locally,
whenever needed.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Operator Safety Summary
Operator Safety Summary
For your protection please read these safety instructions completely before you connect the
equipment to the power source. Carefully observe all warnings, precautions and instructions both
on the apparatus and in these operating instructions.
Keep this manual for future reference.
Water and Moisture
•
•
•
Do not operate the apparatus under or near water - for example near a bathtub, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, near a swimming pool or in other areas with high humidity.
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
Do not touch the product with wet hands.
Cleaning
•
Unplug the apparatus from communication lines, mains power-outlet or any power source
before cleaning or polishing. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free
cloth lightly moistened with water for cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.
Unplug the apparatus from communication lines before cleaning or polishing. Do not use
liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free cloth lightly moistened with water for
cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.
•
Ventilation
•
Do not block any of the ventilation openings of the apparatus. Never cover the slots and
openings with a cloth or other material. Never install the apparatus near heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not place the product in direct sunlight or close to a surface directly heated by the sun.
•
Lightning
Never use this apparatus, or connect/disconnect communication cables or power cables
during lightning storms.
•
Dust
•
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with high concentration of dust
Vibration
•
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with vibration or place it on an unstable surface.
Power connection and Hazardous voltage
•
The product may have hazardous voltage inside. Never attempt to open this product, or any
peripherals connected to the product, where this action requires a tool.
This product should always be powered from an earthed power outlet.
Never connect attached power supply cord to other products.
In case any parts of the product has visual damage never attempt to connect mains power, or
any other power source, before consulting service personnel
•
•
•
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
•
•
The plug connecting the power cord to the product/power supply serves as the main
disconnect device for this equipment. The power cord must always be easily accessible.
Route the power cord so as to avoid it being walked on or pinched by items placed upon or
against it. Pay particular attention to the plugs, receptacles and the point where the cord exits
from the apparatus.
•
•
•
Do not tug the power cord
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician.
Never install cables, or any peripherals, without first unplugging the device from it's power
source.
•
•
•
*Always use the power supply (AC-DC adapter) provided with this product.
*Replace only with power supply (AC-DC adapter) specified by TANDBERG.
*Never connect attached power supply (AC-DC adapter) to other products.
Servicing
•
Do not attempt to service the apparatus yourself as opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other hazards, and will void the warranty. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
•
Unplug the apparatus from it's power source and refer servicing to qualified personnel under
the following conditions:
- If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the apparatus.
- If objects have fallen into the apparatus.
- If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture
- If the apparatus has been subjected to excessive shock by being dropped.
- If the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the apparatus seems to be overheated.
- If the apparatus emits smoke or abnormal odor.
- If the apparatus fails to operate in accordance with the operating instructions
Accessories
•
Use only accessories specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
Communication lines
•
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
•
•
Do not use communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord (ISDN
cables).
* Applies to the following products: T150 MXP, T550 MXP, T770 MXP, T880 MXP, T990 MXP, T1500 MXP, T1000 MXP,
T2000 MXP, T3000 MXP Profile, Tandberg Codec 3000 MXP, Tandberg Tactical MXP, Edge 75/85/95 MXP.
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Contact us
It is also possible to send a fax or mail to the attention of:
Product and Sales Support
TANDBERG
P.O. Box 92
1325 Lysaker
Norway
Tel: +47 67 125 125
Fax: +47 67 125 234
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
Table of Contents
Introduction............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 At a Glance ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................... 9
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Connecting Cables............................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Monitor Configuration........................................................................................................... 16
2.4 System Configuration........................................................................................................... 17
General Use ........................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 The Welcome Screen .......................................................................................................... 21
3.2 Using the Remote Control.................................................................................................... 22
Navigation................................................................................................................ 26
Picture Layout.......................................................................................................... 29
Touch Tones............................................................................................................ 33
3.3 On-screen Indicators............................................................................................................ 35
3.4 Using the Menu.................................................................................................................... 37
3.5 Make a Call.......................................................................................................................... 39
3.6 Answer an incoming call ...................................................................................................... 48
3.7 End Call................................................................................................................................ 49
3.8 Standby................................................................................................................................ 50
Delay Standby for 1 hour......................................................................................... 51
3.9 Phone Book ......................................................................................................................... 54
Call Log.................................................................................................................... 56
My Contacts............................................................................................................. 57
Corporate Contacts / Global Contacts..................................................................... 64
3.10 Camera Control.................................................................................................................. 68
3.10.1 Move Camera .......................................................................................................... 69
3.10.2 Far End Control........................................................................................................ 70
3.10.3 Camera Presets....................................................................................................... 71
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker................................................................................................ 72
3.10.5 Picture Control ......................................................................................................... 73
3.10.6 Camera Tracking ..................................................................................................... 74
3.11 Presentation....................................................................................................................... 75
3.11.1 Presentation Key...................................................................................................... 76
3.11.2 Presentation Menu................................................................................................... 77
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/VGA Input) ................................................................................ 78
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC .................................................................................... 79
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239) ............................................................................ 80
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot................................................................................................. 81
3.11.7 Display Snapshot..................................................................................................... 82
3.12 Conference Services.......................................................................................................... 83
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor............................................................................ 86
3.12.2 Conference Layout................................................................................................... 87
3.12.3 Terminal Names....................................................................................................... 88
3.12.4 Chair Control............................................................................................................ 89
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from Participant.................................................... 90
3.12.6 View Site and End View........................................................................................... 91
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant............................................................................................. 92
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting................................................................................................... 93
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU) .................................................................. 94
Text Chat............................................................................................................. 96
Control Panel.......................................................................................................................... 97
4.1 User Guide........................................................................................................................... 98
4.2 Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................... 99
System Information................................................................................................ 100
System Selftest...................................................................................................... 104
IP Address Conflict Check..................................................................................... 110
Warnings................................................................................................................ 111
4.3 Audio Demo ....................................................................................................................... 113
4.4 Restart................................................................................................................................ 114
System Settings ................................................................................................................... 115
5.1 General Settings ................................................................................................................ 116
Language............................................................................................................... 117
External Services Settings..................................................................................... 122
5.1.10 Date and Time Settings ......................................................................................... 132
5.2 Menu Settings.................................................................................................................... 133
Menu Timeout in Call............................................................................................. 135
Menu on PC........................................................................................................... 137
Number Key Mode................................................................................................. 139
Administrator Password......................................................................................... 142
5.2.10 Icons....................................................................................................................... 148
5.3 Presentation Settings......................................................................................................... 149
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Manual
5.4 Call Quality......................................................................................................................... 159
Max Upstream Rate (kbps).................................................................................... 164
5.5 Audio.................................................................................................................................. 171
Audio Leveling (AGC)............................................................................................ 181
5.6 Video.................................................................................................................................. 184
MultiSite Picture Mode........................................................................................... 189
5.7 Security .............................................................................................................................. 192
Encryption.............................................................................................................. 193
Encryption Mode.................................................................................................... 194
Camera Standby Mode.......................................................................................... 196
5.8 Network.............................................................................................................................. 197
LAN Settings.......................................................................................................... 208
Restore Default Settings........................................................................................ 228
6.1 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 230
Video...................................................................................................................... 230
Audio...................................................................................................................... 236
Network.................................................................................................................. 238
6.2 Document Camera............................................................................................................. 241
6.3 DVD / VCR......................................................................................................................... 242
6.4 Additional Cameras............................................................................................................ 243
6.5 Additional Microphones...................................................................................................... 244
6.7 Stereo Speaker Kit............................................................................................................. 250
6.8 Telephone Add-On............................................................................................................. 252
6.9 Dual Monitor....................................................................................................................... 253
6.13 Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)................................................................... 257
Appendices........................................................................................................................... 259
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 5: Security................................................................................................................ 268
Appendix 6: Using the File System.......................................................................................... 271
Appendix 7: Web Interface....................................................................................................... 272
Glossary ............................................................................................................................... 308
Index..................................................................................................................................... 317
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Introduction
The TANDBERG 7000 MXP provides high-end performance features, large monitors and
precision audio. This creates a collaborative meeting environment for medium to large-sized
meeting rooms.
Users can dial in from a video system outside the enterprise without being registered to a
gatekeeper
The feature enhancement enables dialing through a TANDBERG Gatekeeper without being
registered to it. This makes it easy to call in from a video system outside the enterprise.
To be able to make such a call, this feature must be enabled in your gatekeeper or border
controller, and the called endpoint must be registered with the enterprise gatekeeper or border
controller.
NEW Users can dial in from a video system outside the enterprise without being
registered to a gatekeeper, i.e. dialing from/using a global IP address.
SIP Services
SIP Services enables the user to use the features Add Call and Transfer. To get the SIP Services
available you select SIP as your Net when you make a call. You must have a SIP registrar/VoIP
solution that supports this.
NEW Enhanced SIP services to enable rich services like call transfer and suspend.
Enables integration into Video and Voice over IP (V2oIP) solutions from
Microsoft, Nortel and Avaya.
Controllable Bandwidth
When setting up a call with H.323 the bandwidth can be controlled by the user by setting the
Presentation Rate.
The Presentation Rate is expressed in percent of the Call Rate and shall reflect the H.323
Presentation Rate settings of the sender.
Graphical View of the Audio Streams
The graphical view gives a visual presentation of the active audio streams for the input sources
and the output sources.
In addition the user can play a Test Tone for each audio input and output source.
Presets and Extension Numbers
While in a call, the user presses a number key on remote control to:
•
•
•
add another call
dial extension numbers
use camera presets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The system can be configured to act automatic or to give the user a choice of what to do every
time the user presses a number key on the remote control, when in a call.
Audio Quality
High-performance audio provides a richer, more complete visual communication experience. The
MPEG4 AAC-LD standard is used to provide true standards-based CD-quality, stereo audio.
TM
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM), specifically designed for video meetings, provides
higher fidelity sound for more natural sounding spoken-word. The DNAM features 250W of
power.
Users can record and send stereo audio from stereo presentation and playback sources using
PCs, DVDs and VCRs using the proper cables.
Disturbance from GSM mobile phones and Blackberry devices is eliminated by a noise filter.
Video Quality
Features which ensure high quality video include:
TF
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Natural Video which provides a 60 fields per second true interlaced picture.
WAVE II (Wide Angle View) Camera that delivers the widest angle of view in the industry.
Support for H.264 in MultiSite, DuoVideo/H.239 and encryption.
SXGA input and XGA output through DVI-I (analog or digital).
H.264 video compression up to 2Mbps.
Support for native 16:9 and Wide XGA monitors (1280x768)
NEW High Definition (HD) Support on TANDBERG MXP systems with a DVI input and
output
Network
The system supports video meetings via both IP and ISDN networks. The bandwidth capabilities
are:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
up to 4Mbps* on IP
up to 2Mbps* on ISDN
up to 6Mbps* IP in MultiSite.
H320, H323 and SIP support, for both point-to-point and MultiSite*.
TF
If channels are dropped during a video meeting session, downspeeding automatically maintains
connections without interruption.
Security
TF
Secure Conference provides embedded encryption for both Point-to-Point and MultiSite call and
ensures both privacy and security.
The system is delivered with integrated Expressway™ firewall traversal technology. When used
together with a TANDBERG Border Controller it enables:
ƒ
ƒ
Secure and seamless traversal of ANY firewall.
No missing features when traversing the firewall – works with H.264, MPEG4 audio,
encryption.
ƒ
ƒ
H.460.18 and H.460.19 ITU Standardized firewall traversal, support.
Outside systems, such as home offices, to be part of the enterprise dial plan.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
ƒ
NEW Highest level of embedded encryption as well as IEEE 802.1x and H.235
authentication for security
MultiSite*
The optional embedded MultiSiteTF functionality can connect up to 6 video sites and 5 audio sites.
Embedded MultiSite supports screen layouts such as VoiceSwitched, AutoSplit, 4 Split and 5+1
Split. The optional embedded MultiSite functionality supports any combination of ISDN and IP
participants in a conference (up to the total).
Superior quality and reliability in MultiSite calls is ensured by the systems support for:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DuoVideo/H.239 to provide for presenting full PC resolution information
H235, 802.1x and AES and DES encryption to provide security
H.264 video algorithm to provide the best video at all bandwidths
TF
Rate matching to support different call rates for all sites in a MultiSite
TF
Transcoding to support different protocols for all sites in a MultiSite.
The TANDBERG video communication system can also be used as an audio telephone bridge
(assuming ISDN connection(s)).
Presentations
The Natural Presenter Package* (NPP) makes it possible to include PC presentations in
videoconferences and comprises:
TF
ƒ
ƒ
Digital Clarity which transmits exceptionally high-quality, native resolution video.
TF
Duo Video /H.239 which allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a
presenter on one screen and a live PC presentation in native resolution on a second
monitor (up to SXGA on compatible monitors).
TF
ƒ
ƒ
PC Presenter which allows a PC connection via standard DVI/VGA cable supporting up
to SXGA resolution.
TF
PC SoftPresenter which shows PC images via a LAN connection supporting XGA
resolution.
ƒ
ƒ
Auto Layout to automatically choose the best layout for the call.
PC Zoom which allows the native resolution PC image to be zoomed in/out with the
remote control to get SXGA resolution.
Users can display video and presentations in the best layout based on the situation. Supported
screen layouts are:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Picture in Picture (PiP)
Picture outside Picture (PoP)
Side by Side
User interfaces
A web-interface to the codec provides:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System management, diagnostics and software uploads.
Text chat/closed captioning.
Unicast Streaming – which allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network to a
single compatible client (RealMedia™ or Apple Quicktime™) or streaming server.
The On-Screen Menu:
ƒ
ƒ
Provides an easy interface for first-time users with symbols and descriptions.
Builds upon the familiar current interface.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
ƒ
ƒ
Enhanced language support with Asian and non-Latin character text input in the menu for
local language system names
Simplified on-screen menu, Kiosk Mode, for special purposes
The remote control has a simplified look and feel, an auto system wake-up when picked up, and
large, easy-to-read keys.
Interoperability
The TANDBERG 7000 MXP is worldwide compatible with other ITU standards-based
videoconferencing systems from many other vendors worldwide.
* - optional feature. To check which options are installed, select Control Panel - Diagnostics - System Information in the
menu.
TF
- TANDBERG First
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.1 At a Glance
WAVE II Camera
The main camera is mounted on top of the product. The main camera includes a high quality
color camera with a fast pan/tilt/zoom/focus action. The main camera is controlled by the
system’s infrared remote control and operates pan/tilt, focus and zoom. Up to fifteen camera
positions can be pre-stored using Camera Presets.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Monitors
The main monitor displays the far-end and near-end videoconferencing sites in addition to the
menus and video from connected video sources. The second monitor displays selfview,
Snapshots and Duo Video.
Codec
The codec is the heart of the system. Its main task is the compression of outgoing video, audio
and data, the transmission of this information to the far end and the decompression of the
incoming information - the name codec comes from a combination of the two words compression
and decompression.
Remote Control
The remote control is used to control all functions of the system. If the screen saver is activated
(black monitor), touching the remote control will automatically wake up the system. The remote
control uses 4 AAA batteries. The system will tell you when batteries are running low. Change the
batteries at the back of the remote control. Please follow the guidelines on the packing material
for handling and disposal instructions for the batteries.
The reach of the remote control signal is 20 meters. For users sitting in an open plan office, this
can cause problems. Use the little, white switch placed under the batteries to change the reach of
the signal from 20 meters to 2 meters. This will prevent you from unintentionally controlling
another video system, when you control your own system.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Microphone
The high quality table microphone is designed to be placed on a table during a videoconference.
Up to three microphones can be connected. The ideal location for the microphone is on a flat
surface at least 2m (6.5 ft) from the front of the system. The microphone cable should always
point towards the system. The system will automatically equalize sound levels. Loud and soft
voices are picked up and transmitted to the far end at approximately the same level.
Digital Natural Audio Module
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) is designed to enhance the audio quality during a
videoconference. The DNAM provides natural sounding audio, as if the person or another sound
source in the conference is present in the same room as you.
The DNAM is a frequency-compensated sound system optimized for voice and other sounds that
appears in modern videoconferencing. It is designed and dedicated specifically for
videoconferencing requirements. The use of the highest quality speaker elements as well as
proper amplifier- and software techniques minimizes signal distortion.
The system will automatically detect the DNAM and optimize the audio output. Once detected the
audio output will be in digital format (S/PDIF). The DNAM supports both analog and digital input.
The DNAM is mounted in the bottom of the system, below the speaker cabinet.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
TANDBERG Tracker
The tracker is a small infrared remote control device made
to steer the camera to any desired location within the
room. Typically, several trackers would be used with each
system.
Each tracker has two buttons:
ƒ
ƒ
One Single person button to point the camera at a
specific person/location.
One Group button to point the camera at all
participants.
Beneath the battery in the tracker, there is a switch, which
can be set to 16 different positions between 0 and F. For
camera preset 10 to 15, the numbers A to F should be
selected.
For more information, contact your local TANDBERG
representative.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.2 Menu Structure
The Menu is available for all users and contains all the functionality of the system. The Control
Panel contains all the settings of the system. Making changes to the settings will change the
behavior of the system. The menu structure is shown below.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Note that the system features and menu settings may vary depending on network selection
and software package.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Installation
Precautions:
ƒ
ƒ
Never install communication wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
ƒ
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
ƒ
ƒ
Use caution when installing or modifying communication lines.
Avoid using communication equipment (other than a cordless type) during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
Do not use the communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Always connect the product to an earthed socket outlet.
The socket outlet shall be installed near to the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Never install cables without first switching the power OFF.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
1TR6 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used behind a PABX.
ƒ
ƒ
X.21 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used together with already approved equipment,
and is not meant for direct connections to the telecommunication networks.
V.35/RS-449/RS-366 network type is not approved for connection directly to the
telecommunications network. This network type is only to be used together with already
approved equipment, and is not intended for direct connection to the telecommunication
networks.
This product complies with directives: LVD 73/23/EC, EMC 89/366/EEC, R&TTE 99/5/EEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting
1 Unpacking
The TANDBERG 7000 MXP is delivered in one transport case with all components inside as
shown in figure 1:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Foot
Column
Monitor Frame with built-in LCD monitors
Monitor Rear Cover
W.A.V.E. II Camera
Accessories box which will contain the
following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Two Table Microphones
Remote Control and Tracker with batteries
Cables
Documentation
Figure 1
2 Mounting of the base
Place the column with the bolts into the bolt holes on the foot as shown in figure 2. Secure the
column and the foot with nuts (nuts and wrench is found in the accessories box) by tipping the
base (column/foot) as shown in figure 3. Place the base in an upright position where the system
is supposed to stand.
Figure 3
Figure 2
3 Installing the monitor frame
Lift the monitor frame out of the transport case. Do not remove the protective plastic film from the
monitor front before the monitor frame is securely fastened to the base.
Place the monitor frame on top of the base. Make sure that the cables from the rear side of the
monitor frame do not get stuck between the base and the monitor frame.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
The bolts on the bottom of the monitor frame (front) shall go through the top plate of the base.
Secure the monitor frame to the base with 2 hexagonal-shaped screws as shown in figure 4, and
with 2 nuts inside the front panel of the base as shown in figure 5.
Figure 5
Figure 4
4 Monitor back cover
Make sure that all cables are connected (se chapter 2.2 Connecting cables) and then lead them
down through the cable duct on the back side of the column. Slide the duct cover of the column
into place. Make sure that all cables come out at the bottom of the column without being
squeezed by the duct cover.
The monitor back cover is kept in place by magnets. Place the cover against the magnetic points
on the monitor frame as shown in figure 7. The front cover if the monitor frame is made of plastic
and should be treated with care.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Figure 7
Figure 6
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.2 Connecting Cables
1. Power cable
Connect the system power cable to the correct country variant of the power cable. Connect this
cable to an electrical distribution socket.
2. Microphone cable
Connect the microphone cables to the microphones.
3. DNAM Audio Module - audio cable
Connect the RCA cable coming out of the bottom of the base to Audio out 1 on the codec.
4. Camera cable
Place the camera centrally on top of the monitor frame, in line with the front of the screen, after
connecting the 2 cables as shown below. Remove the protection paper which is placed behind
the front glass of the camera. The camera should be aligned with the front edge of the monitor
to ensure the IR-sensor in the camera can pick up signals from the remote control.
5a. ISDN cables - using BRI interface
Connect the ISDN cables to the ISDN sockets (S/T-interface) provided by the service provider.
The main number will be the number associated with the socket to which ISDN cable number 1
is connected. (The system does not have a built-in network terminator. If the wall socket
provides an ISDN U-interface, an NT1 between the system and the ISDN line is needed, see
Appendix 10.)
5b. ISDN cable - using the PRI interface
If using the PRI interface, the E1/T1 cable should be connected to a CSU (Channel Service
Unit). A CSU between the system and the PRI line is needed from the network provider, see
Appendix 8.
5c. Other networks - using the External Network interface
If using other networks, please refer to chapter ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1 and Appendix 9.
6. LAN cable
To use the system on LAN, connect a LAN cable from the Ethernet connector on the system to
the LAN.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
2.3 Monitor Configuration
Power on
Switch the system on by connecting the power cable to an electrical distribution socket. After the
system has performed a self-test routine, the Menu will be displayed on the monitor.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.4 System Configuration
The system must be configured for each installation. Configuration settings can be made via the
system menu. If an external IMUX or non-standard network is being used it may be necessary to
configure any associated external equipment.
Navigate through the menu system using the arrow keys and OK. Remember to press the Save
button on the bottom of each menu to save the changes. Press Cancel (x) to return to the
previous Menu. See General Use for more information about how to use the menus and the
remote control.
General configuration:
1. Open the General Settings menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control Panel -
General to open the General Settings menu.
2. Language
Press OK in the Language field and select the desired language from the list.
3. System Name / International Name*
Enter a name in the System Name field using the number keys on the remote control,
in the same way as with a mobile or cellular phone. Hold down the # key for one
second to switch back and forth from numbers to alpha characters.
4. Auto Answer, Phone Book Settings, External Services Settings and
Permissions
These settings may be left unchanged if no special needs are required. See chapter
General Settings for more information.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5. Screen Settings
When using wide screen (16:9) monitors, set TV Monitor Format to Wide (16:9).
TANDBERG also recommends setting Picture Layout to Picture outside Picture when
using 16:9 monitors. Picture outside Picture provides a display layout optimized for
wide screen monitors. The display layout may be changed at any time using the
Layout button on the remote control.
6. Software Options
To activate options for the system, a new option key must be entered in the Software
Options menu (see paperwork accompanying the system). The Presenter option key
should be entered under “New Option Key”. Any bandwidth option key should be
entered under “New Bandwidth Key”. For more information on these options, please
contact your TANDBERG representative.
7. Date and Time Settings
Select your preferred Date and Time Settings.
8. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in a menu by selecting the Save button on the
menu line and pressing OK.
Network configuration:
1. Open the Network menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control Panel -
Network to open the Network menu.
2. ISDN configuration
Set the Network type to the desired network. Specify the settings for the selected
network in the relevant menu. Enabled but unused ISDN lines (i.e. lines not active)
should be disabled. For details, follow the instructions in ISDN /External/Leased
E1/T1. See also the examples in Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched
56 network and in Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters.
3. LAN configuration
Select LAN Settings in the Network menu and specify the necessary LAN settings
according to the instructions from your LAN administrator. For details, follow the
instructions in LAN Settings. If there is an H.323 Gatekeeper present on your LAN,
refer to H.323 Settings as well.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
4. Network Profiles
Please refer to Network Profiles for details
5. Data Port
Please refer to Data Port for details
6. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in the menu by selecting the Save button on
the Menu line and pressing OK.
* The International Name field is only visible if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin
character text input.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 General Use
Wake up the system
When the system is not in use, it is in standby mode and the screens are black. Wake up the
system by picking up the remote control. An incoming call or pressing any key on the remote
control will also wake up the system.
If the system does not respond:
ƒ
ƒ
Make sure that the system is switched on by using the On/Off switch located at the rear
of the Codec.
Verify that your monitor is switched on. This is normally done by pushing the power
button on the front of the monitor depending on monitor type
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.1 The Welcome Screen
When the system is switched on, the welcome screen will be displayed. The welcome screen
presents the menu and displays your main camera image in the background (display main
camera is the default setting). The ISDN/IP numbers and the system name are displayed in the
upper right corner. The ISDN Number and IP Number are the dial-in numbers of the system.
The welcome screen provides you with the most important system information:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System Name
Your ISDN Number
Your IP Address or IP Number
Indications of Missed Calls or Warnings if any
It is possible to customize the text on the welcome screen. See Menu Settings for how to edit the
welcome text.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.2 Using the Remote Control
The system is controlled with a remote control. Think of the remote control as a mobile phone
with number keys and call keys. Use the arrow keys and press OK to navigate through the
menus. The system’s most commonly used functions are also accessible directly from the remote
control. The Infra Red (IR) sensor for the remote control is located in front of the WAVE II
Camera. There is also a second IR-sensor located in the front of the Codec itself, which will be
automatically enabled if the WAVE II Camera is not connected.
The remote control (TRC 3)
1. Mic Off turns your microphone on and
off, see Mic off.
2. Arrow keys are used for navigation in
the menu and for moving the camera*
when the menu is hidden, see
Navigation.
3. Volume + and – adjusts the Codec
volume only and not the monitor's
volume, see Volume + and -.
4. The Layout key toggles between full
screen and different display layouts, see
Layout.
5. Cancel takes you back one step in the
menu system. Use Cancel to delete
characters in an input field, see
Navigation. Press and hold the Cancel
key for 1 second to close the menu.
6. Press the Call key to place a call, see
Make a Call.
7. Camera presets define specific camera
positions. Move the camera to the
desired position and press and hold a
number key for 1 second to save the
current camera position to that number
key. To activate a preset whilst in a call,
simply press and release that number
key, see Camera Presets.
8. Snapshot takes a snapshot of your video
only while you are in a call, see Take
New Snapshot.
9. The Presentation key switches to a
predefined presentation source. If the
Presentation key is held down for 1
second then the Presentation video
sources menu will appear, see
Presentation Key.
10. Press OK/Menu to show the menu and
to select menu items, see Navigation.
11. Use Zoom + and – to zoom the camera
in and out.*
12. Selfview displays your outgoing video.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Press Selfview again to turn selfview off,
see Selfview.
13. Use the Phone Book to store and recall
video contacts for easy placement of
calls, see Phone Book.
14. Use the red End Call key to end the
current call. Pressing this key when not
in a call will place the system in Standby
mode, see End Call and Standby.
15. Number/Letter keys function in the same
manner as with a mobile or cellular
phone, see Number and Letter keys.
16. Press Touch tones when you are in a
call and need to dial extension numbers
etc. (instead of presets). Press the
OK/Menu button to exit Touch Tones,
see Touch tones.
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The remote control (TRC 4)**:
1. Change video source. If
possible, you will start open a
Dual Stream. Press the video
source button again to stop
the dual stream.
2. Mic Off turns your microphone
on and off, see Mic off.
3. Arrow keys are used for
navigation in the menu and for
moving the camera* when the
menu is hidden, see
Navigation.
4. Volume + and – adjusts the
Codec volume only and not
the monitor's volume, see
Volume + and -.
5. The Layout key toggles
between full screen and
different display layouts, see
Layout.
6. Cancel takes you back one
step in the menu system. Use
Cancel to delete characters in
an input field, see Navigation.
Press and hold the Cancel
key for 1 second to close the
menu.
7. Press the Call key to place a
call, see Make a Call.
8. Number/Letter keys function
in the same manner as with a
mobile or cellular phone, see
Number and Letter keys.
Camera presets define
specific camera positions.
Move the camera to the
desired position and press
and hold a number key for 1
second to save the current
camera position to that
number key. To activate a
preset whilst in a call, simply
press and release that
number key, see Camera
Presets.
9. Press Preset + a number to
activate a preset.
10. Press the Services button to
open the Services menu.
11. The Presentation key
switches to a predefined
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
presentation source. If the
Presentation key is held down
for 1 second then the
Presentation video sources
menu will appear, see
Presentation Key.
12. Press OK/Menu to show the
menu and to select menu
items, see Navigation.
13. Use Zoom + and – to zoom
the camera in and out.*
14. Selfview displays your
outgoing video. Press
Selfview again to turn selfview
off, see Selfview.
15. Use the Phone Book to store
and recall video contacts for
easy placement of calls, see
Phone Book.
16. Use the red End Call key to
end the current call. Pressing
this key when not in a call will
place the system in Standby
mode, see End Call and
Standby.
17. Snapshot takes a snapshot of
your video only while you are
in a call, see Take New
Snapshot.
18. Press Touch tones when you
are in a call and need to dial
extension numbers etc.
(instead of presets). Press the
OK/Menu button to exit Touch
Tones, see Touch tones.
19. Pressing Far End turns Far
End control on and off.
20. Press the Help button to open
the User Guide menu.
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.
** Ordered separately
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.2.1
Navigation
Arrow keys and OK
Navigate in the menu with the arrow keys on the remote control. The
orange selector on screen shows the selected item. Press OK to select.
Cancel key
In the Menu, pressing Cancel (X) will hide the menu. If the menu is hidden,
bring it back with OK. In other menus, pressing Cancel (X) takes you one
step back. In an input field, pressing Cancel (X) will delete
characters/numbers to the left.
Back/Cancel button
The X button in the menu corresponds with the X key on the remote.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.2.2
Selfview
The term “Selfview” means the outgoing image. In a normal call using the main camera, this is
the image of you. The Selfview button toggles the images between Far End, Selfview and Dual
Video (if any).
How to use Selfview:
1. Outside a call, pressing the Selfview button will switch between the near end video and a
black screen/logo on the main monitor.
2. In a point to point call, press the Selfview button once to switch from far end video to near
end video to see a full screen picture of the outgoing video. Press Selfview again to go
back to normal.
3. In a point to point call with a dual video stream, the dual stream is displayed in the big
picture. Press the Selfview button to toggle to the Near End picture, then the Far End
picture, and finally back to the dual stream.
The above behaviour is similar for both single monitor systems and dual monitor systems.
Selfview applies to the main monitor.
3.2.2.1 Local PC Display
When using the screen as your PC screen, it is recommended to set Local PC Display to On, see
Screen Settings. That implies that you can display your PC locally while having a video meeting
and you can keep on working without having the Far End participant viewing your PC screen.
Note that this applies to single monitor systems only.
It is also recommended to keep the Auto Layout setting On (default) to get a suitable layout when
toggling from Local PC Display mode to standard conference mode.
Use the Selfview button to toggle between Local PC Display mode and standard videoconference
mode. An indicator tells you that your PC image is displayed locally.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Example:
You are using the system as a PC and get an incoming call.
When the setting “Use Screen as Local PC monitor” is On, you will keep your PC image
displayed locally and the incoming call pops up in a PIP or as smaller images in a 1+3
layout, depending on your system. You will see Local PC displayed in the big picture
and Far End and/or Near End (your self) displayed in smaller pictures.
Press the Selfview button to switch to standard conference mode. The Local PC image
is no longer displayed and Far End is displayed in the big picture or full screen. Press
Selfview again to see Near End. Pressing Selfview a third time will bring back the Local
PC display mode.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.2.3
Picture Layout
The layout of the screen can either be shown as Picture in Picture (PIP) or Picture outside Picture
(POP) when displaying more than one video image. The behavior of the Layout button is
dependent on the Picture Layout setting in Screen Settings.
3.2.3.1 Picture in Picture
When Picture Layout is set to PIP, the Layout button makes it possible to see a second image in
a smaller view in one of the corners of the screen. The second image will be placed on top of the
main image. The user can decide in which corner the second image is to be displayed.
3.2.3.2 Picture outside Picture
When Picture Layout is set to POP, the Layout button makes it possible to see up to three images
in a composition optimized for wide screens. The second image can be displayed either as a
side-by-side the main image (1+1) or smaller images next to the main image (1+2 and 1+3).
Press the Layout button once to get side-by-side view (1+1). Press again to get the layouts 1+2
and 1+3, and finally go back to full screen view. You can also go back to full screen directly by
pressing and holding Layout for 1 second. It is recommended to use Picture outside Picture for
wide screen monitor systems.
3.2.3.3 Auto Layout
The system will automatically choose the best layout for your call. The layouts vary depending on
how many participants there are and if you use a dual video source or not. You can however
always change layout manually with the Layout button. Auto Layout applies when you open or
close a dual stream, or add or disconnect participants.
Auto Layout also includes the former automatic PIP. That implies that PIP will automatically be
shown when suitable, e.g. to display selfview when you move your near end camera. The
automatic PIP times out after a couple of seconds.
If Auto Layout is Off you will get no automatic layout changes during a call and the user must
manually control the images with the Layout button. Auto Layout is default On. To turn Auto
Layout Off, go to Screen Settings.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.2.4
Mic Off
To mute the microphone during a call, press the Mic off button. An on-screen indicator appears in
the upper right corner when the microphone is off. In a call, if audio is detected, the on-screen
symbol will start to flash. Pressing the Mic off button one more time will activate the microphone
again.
Note that Mic off will mute all microphone inputs and audio 4 input, but will not mute audio from
the AUX and VCR inputs.
When an incoming call is answered, the microphone may be in the off state because the Auto
Answer setting is On+Mic off, see Auto Answer. The icon will start to flash when you start
speaking. Remember to turn the microphone on before a meeting.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.2.6
Number and Letter keys
Pressing a number key when outside a call will bring up the call menu. When in a call, the
number keys are used for Camera Presets. Press a number and go to the corresponding Camera
Preset (see Camera Presets). However, when accessing an input field where numbers are
required, the system automatically goes to number mode and numbers can be dialed with the
number keys as usual.
When accessing an input field where letters are required, the system automatically goes to letter
mode. Writing letters works like on a mobile phone. Press the key that corresponds to your
desired letter. Press the key as many times as needed to get the right letter. Change to lower or
back to upper case letters with the a/A key, and space with the 0 _ key.
To write numbers in a text input field, press the button through all the letters. Press once more
and the number will appear.
Example: How to write "System 123" in the System Name input field:
Press the 7-key four times to get an "S".
Press the #-key once to switch between upper case and lower case letters.
Press the 9-key three times to get a "y".
Press the 7-key four times to get an "s".
Press the 8-key once to get a "t".
Press the 3-key twice to get an "e".
Press the 6-key once to get an "m".
Press the 0-key once to get space.
Press the 1-key three times to get a "1".
Press the 2-key four times to get a "2".
Press the 3-key four times to get a "3".
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.2.7
Touch Tones
To activate dialing touch tones during a call, press the Touch tones button. Otherwise the number
keys will work as configured in the Number Key Mode, see Control Panel – Menu Settings –
Number Key Mode. An indicator will let you know that Touch tones are enabled. Press OK to exit
Touch tone mode.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.2.8
Presets and Extension Numbers
When pressing a number key on the remote control, while in a call, the user can decide what
shall happen. The system can be configured to act automatic or manual.
While in a call, the user presses a number key to:
•
•
•
add another call
dial extension numbers
use camera presets
Setting Number Key to Automatic:
Some users want the camera presets as the default action when pressing a number key, when in
a call. The number keys can be configured to always act like this; or to act in accordance to any
of the other available choices.
Setting Number Key to Manual:
Sometimes, when you are in a call, you need to switch between adding another call, dial
extension numbers or use camera presets. Then you would want the system to give you a choice
of what to do. If you configure the Number Key Mode to Manual you can select the preferred
action when pressing a number key.
For more information about Number Key Mode, please see Control Panel - Menu Settings –
Number Key Mode.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.3 On-screen Indicators
The system has a number of icons signaling different settings:
Microphone Off
This indicator is shown when the microphone is turned off. Press the Mic off
button again to turn the microphone back on, see Mic Off for details.
Volume Off
This indicator is shown when the volume is turned off. Press Volume + to turn the
volume back on, see Volume + and - for details.
Secure Conference, AES
This double padlock indicator is shown when AES encryption (Secure
Conference) is active, see Security for details.
Secure Conference, DES
This padlock indicator is shown when DES encryption (Secure Conference) is
active, see Security for details.
Not Secure Conference
This open padlock indicator is shown during the initialization phase for AES or
DES encryption. During this period the call is not secure, see Security for details.
Warning
This indicates that the system has detected a warning. Select the icon and press
OK to see details on the warning. Please see Warnings for a list of possible
warnings.
Bad Network
This indicator appears if the system detects network anomalies like packet loss
(5%), jitter (200ms) etc., during a call. Open the menu by pressing the OK/Menu
button and select the warnings icon too see details.
Floor
This indicator is shown when you are displayed in full screen in a multipoint
conference, see Request Floor and Release Floor for details.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Telephone
This indicates that there is a telephone participant in the conference. The
displayed number indicates how many telephone participants there are in the
conference.
Duo Video / H.239
This indicates that there is a Dual Video Stream sent from you (near end). The
feature Duo Video / H239 allows participants at the far end to simultaneously
watch a presenter on one screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The menu contains the following items:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Make a Call/Add Another Call
Standby/End Call
Camera Control
Presentation
Conference Services
Control Panel
Close
See Menu Structure for a full overview of the menu.
The functions of the menu are displayed as icons. The currently selected icon is marked by an
orange square, and the name of the corresponding function is displayed on the line above, see
the figure above.
Press the OK button to activate the currently selected function.
The menu automatically times out after 15 seconds if not used, see Menu timeout. Press the
Menu button to bring it back. It is also possible to hide the menu manually by pressing the Cancel
button on the remote control or select the Close icon in the menu.
* Systems with no Camera Control icon available may have a Far End Control icon present when in a call and Far End
Control is possible.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.5 Make a Call
It is easy to make a call:
1. Press the green Call button on remote control and Dial number
2. Press the green Call button again to initiate the call
Display the call menu by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
The TANDBERG system can make both Video calls and Telephone calls.
Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. It is possible to alter the default call settings for the
current call if required. The Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call
Settings.
It is possible to start Streaming from this menu.
For setting up a MultiSite conference, see Add Call for more details.
•
If the system has an embedded MCU (Multipoint Control Unit) you can set up a Multisite
conference.
The Phonebook and Call Type Selector icons are placed to the right of the Dial Number entry
field.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.5.1
Place a Call
The TANDBERG system can make both Video calls and Telephone calls. A Call Type selector
button is placed to the right of the number entry field. The button shows if it is a video call
(default) or a telephone call. Press the button to show a drop down list to select the type of call.
Display the Call menu by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
In the Call menu, enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant.
Select type of Call – Telephone Call or Video Call
1. If you are dialing manually you might need to change the type of call. A button to the right
of the entry field shows if you have a telephone call or a video call. This button is called
the Call Type Selector.
2. Click on the Call Type Selector to the left of the entry field and press OK to see the
options. Select the type of call, Video Call or Telephone Call and press OK.
When dialing manually, toggle between ABC/abc by pressing the # button on the remote control
and between abc/123 by holding the # button for one second. For IP addresses, use a star as
separator in the IP address.
If you are making a video call and the system is registered on a gatekeeper or border controller
with DNS support, there are several ways to call into the system:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
<IP address>
<E.164>
<H.323 ID>
<H.323 ID>@<domain>
<E.164>@<domain>
<H.323 ID>@<IP address>
<E.164>@<IP address>
See H.323 Settings for details.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Place the call by either:
1. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Call icon and press OK, or
2. Press the green call button on the remote control.
TIP: When dialing a telephone number and pressing the green Call button on the remote control,
the system will in most cases automatically interpret the number as a video number and not a
telephone number. The interpretation can sometimes take a little while and it is faster to use the
Call Type Selector button in the menu.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.5.2
Add Call
(Optional feature)
Conference systems with built-in MultiSite can handle up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls
simultaneously.
It is possible to both set up a conference with many participants and also add participants during
a conference.
Set up a conference with two or more participants
Display the Call menu by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
Add participant(s) to the conference:
1. Select the Add Call icon and press OK.
2. Dial Number manually, or
3. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant, see Phone Book for details. It is also possible to select a predefined MultiSite
entry, see New MultiSite Contact. Press OK on the remote control.
TIP: Set up a list of all the wanted conference participants by selecting the Add Call the desired
number of times, and enter their numbers afterwards.
Select the Call Type – Telephone Call or Video Call
1. If you are dialing manually you might need to change the type of call. A button to the right
of the entry field shows if you have a telephone call or a video call. This button is called
the Call Type Selector.
2. Click on the Call Type Selector and press OK to see the options. Select the type of call,
Video Call or Telephone Call and press OK.
Start Multisite conference:
1. When all participants have been added to the list, press OK button on remote control or
select the Place Call icon on the menu to start the Multisite conference.
Add participant(s) during a conference:
1. Display the Call menu during a call and select Add Another Call from the menu, or the
green Call button on the remote control.
2. Enter new participants in the same way as described above.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.5.3
Call Settings
The Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. Each call will be set up with the default Call
Settings if the settings are not altered. Normally it is not necessary for the user to alter the
settings.
The Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.
When setting up a call in the Make a Call menu:
1. Select the Call Settings field for the participant and press the OK button on the remote
control.
2. Make desired changes to Network, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k). If this is to be the new
default call settings, select Set as Default in the menu.
3. Select the OK icon and press the OK button on the remote control.
It is possible to make the changes made to the Call Settings default by selecting Set as Default
and OK. These settings will now be the default settings for all future manually dialed calls.
These settings are also available in the menu Control Panel - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.5.4
SIP Services
SIP enables you to use the features Add Call and Transfer even if your system doesn’t have
multipoint capabilities. To get the SIP Services available, you have to make a call using SIP as
your Net. (See Call Settings)
3.5.4.1 Add Call
You can add another call to your existing SIP call.
How to Add another Call:
1) Open the menu by pressing OK (if it is not already open).
2) Press Add another Call or press the green button on the remote to open the Call menu.
3) Dial number of your next call. Press Place Call or press the green key on the remote
control to connect the call.
4) The second call connects. The menu displays an icon below the menu line to indicate
that you have a call waiting.
3.5.4.2 Transfer
It is possible to transfer your call to another number.
How to Transfer a point to point call:
1) Open the menu by pressing OK (if it is not already open).
2) Press Add another Call or press the green button on the remote control to open the Call
menu.
3) Dial the number of the person you would like to transfer your call to.
4) Choose the Transfer Call button and press OK. Your call is transferred.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.5.5
Streaming
Streaming lets you broadcast your meeting to participants on the web. The web participants can
listen to the meeting, see snapshots, but not participate themselves. Snapshots of current stream
(if MultiSite), selfview, far end and DuoVideo streams are accessible via http. See Appendix 6 for
descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
How to use Streaming:
1. Choose Streaming from the Call Menu to open the Streaming menu.
2. Press Start Streaming from the menu line. An indicator will appear on the screen when
streaming is activated.
3. Press Stop Streaming to end streaming. Streaming will also end when you disconnect the
call.
4. Press Streaming Settings if you want to change streaming settings (see Streaming
Settings below)
How to view streaming from a PC:
1. After streaming is started, an easy way to view the streamed audio/video is to start your
Web browser and enter the IP-address of the streaming system.
2. After the Web page of the system is shown, click on Streaming. Alternatively, enter
http://<codec/ip-address>/showstream.ssi
Streaming Settings
Address
Address is defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming
server or a multicast address. Giving an address in the range 224.0.0.1-
239.255.255.255 will broadcast the stream to any host that has joined
the specified multicast group. Specifying normal broadcast address
255.255.255.255 will broadcast to any members on the LAN.
Address Port
If several codec’s are streaming to the same IP-address, different ports
have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.
If the first codec streams on port 2240 and the second codec on port
2250, the client has to specify which port to listen to. Video is
transmitted on the specified port; audio is transmitted on the port
number 4 greater than the specified video port, in this case 2244 and
2254.
TTL/Router
Hops
This is used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data
should pass before it is rejected. If TTL is set to 2, data will not traverse
more than 2 router hops.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Streaming
Source*
ƒ
Auto: Enables streaming of both local and far end video.
Selection of which site to be streamed is done using voice
switching (the site that speaks is streamed).
ƒ
ƒ
Local: Only the local video will be streamed.
Remote: Only the far end video will be streamed.
Local and far end audio is always streamed.
Allow Remote
Start
ƒ
ƒ
On: Streaming can be started from external user interfaces like
the Web-browser or Telnet session.
Off: Streaming can only be started from the Video Conferencing
System User Interface using the remote control, or by using the
Data port. This will prevent activation of streaming using Web
browser or Telnet sessions. See also Password section below
Announcements
ƒ
ƒ
On: The codec will send announcement packets to the network
that it is streaming. This enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC)
to connect to the codec’s streaming session. Used by Cisco
IP/TV.
Off: No announcement packets will be transmitted.
Video Rate
Defines the Video streaming rate from the system. Range is 16 kbps -
320 kbps. In addition, audio (G.711) streaming rate is 64 kbps, providing
a maximum streaming rate of 384 kbps.
Streaming
Password
Set password so that only participants entering correct password will be
able to view the streaming session. Entering a password will prevent
unauthorized people from accessing the streaming session.
*The streaming source setting is not available when streaming only is supported outside a call.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.5.6
Dialing In From Outside the Enterprise
Dialing in Without Being Registered to a TANDBERG Gatekeeper
The feature enhancement enables dialing through a TANDBERG Gatekeeper without being
registered to it. This makes it easy to call in from a video system outside the enterprise.
It's done by dialing: EndPointAlias@GatekeeperAddress[:Port] where:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
EndPointAlias: is the alias of the endpoint you want to call, the endpoint you call must be
registered with this alias on the gatekeeper
GatekeeperAddress: is either the IP-address of the gatekeeper in the form a.b.c.d (or
IPv6 a:b:c:d:a:b:c:d) or the DNS name (A/AAAA or SRV record) of the gatekeeper.
Port: is optional and gives the Q.931 port to initiate the call. The port default is 1720 and
can in most cases be left out.
Currently the SRV records _h323cs._tcp. and _h323ts._tcp. are supported.
If using an IP-address, or if not specifying the port, the default is using the normal Q.931 with port
1720.
NOTE! To be able to make such a call, this feature must be enabled in your gatekeeper or border
controller, and the called endpoint must be registered with the enterprise gatekeeper or border
controller.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.6 Answer an incoming call
How to answer an incoming call:
ƒ
To accept an incoming call, press the OK button or the green Call button on the remote
control.
How to reject an incoming call:
ƒ
To reject an incoming call, select the Reject icon and press the OK button, or press the
End Call button on the remote control.
Incoming calls will connect automatically if Auto Answer is set to On, see Auto Answer for details.
When idle, the system will accept all incoming calls as long as Incoming MCU Calls and Incoming
Telephone Calls are set to On, see Permissions for details. Also, Do Not Disturb must not be
activated, see Do Not Disturb for more details.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.7 End Call
How to end a call:
ƒ
ƒ
Press the red End Call button on the remote control, or
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu and select End Call.
When the End Call dialog box is displayed either:
ƒ
ƒ
Press the red End Call button on the remote control again, or
Press the OK button to confirm that the call is to be ended.
How to end a MultiSite call:
In the list of participants:
Note that switching off the monitor(s), using the power button on the monitor, will not end a
call. Some systems come with monitors that are not possible to switch off.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.8 Standby
The system will automatically go to Standby mode when it is not in use. In standby mode, the
screen(s) are black. It is however still possible to receive incoming calls.
How to enter standby mode manually:
ƒ
ƒ
Select Standby from the menu and select Standby Now, or
Press the End Call button on the remote control twice.
How to exit standby mode:
When the system is in standby, pick up the remote control, or press any of its keys to
activate the system again.
ƒ
The standby mode of the system should be enabled if the system is to be left idle.
Note! Standby is not activated by switching off the power to the monitor(s) (some systems
come with monitors that are not possible to switch off.).
When Camera Standby Mode is On
When Camera Standby mode is On, the camera turns away when standby is activated. When the
system is activated the camera turns back to normal position.
If the system is set for Use screen as Local PC monitor, see Screen Settings, the Standby
mode will be disabled when the codec detects a video signal from the PC. If the PC video
signal is not detected, the standby mode will be re-enabled.
It is possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour or 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour and Delay Standby for 3 hours.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.8.1
Delay Standby for 1 hour
Delay Standby for 1 hour postpones the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 3 hours.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.8.2
Delay Standby for 3 hours
Delay Standby for 3 hours postpones the automatic standby mode for 3 hours.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.8.3
Do Not Disturb
To prevent the system from accepting any incoming calls, activate the Do Not Disturb function.
The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the system. The monitor will be black when Do Not
Disturb is active, see figure below. This is useful when using the display for a presentation as
a local PC monitor and you do not wish any incoming calls during the presentation.
End Do Not Disturb by pressing any key on the remote control.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9 Phone Book
The Phone Book is available via the Phone Book button on the remote control or from the Make a
Call menu.
Using the Phone Book is time saving and prevents the user from inadvertently calling the wrong
number. The contacts are sorted alphabetically. The contact names are displayed in the list and
the telephone or video numbers, bandwidth and net profiles of the selected contact are displayed
at the bottom line.
Navigate up and down in the Phone Book with the arrow keys on the remote control. Use the
letter keys to search through the contacts beginning with the typed letter.
Find names starting with a “C”:
•
Press the 2-key three times to get a "C".
Find the name Charlie:
•
•
Press the 2-key three times to get a "C".
Press the 4-key two times to continue with a "h".
Remove letters by pressing the Cancel button on the remote control.
The Up One Level button brings you to the top of list and clears all letters typed.
The functions in the Phone Book are available when pressing the left arrow key on the remote
control, and then the up and down arrow keys. Note that the last selected contact will be marked.
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the folders Placed Calls, Missed
Calls, Received Calls and My Contacts. Global Contacts are listed below these folders.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
The following information is available from the Phone Book:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Placed Calls
Missed Calls
Received Calls
My Contacts
Corporate Contacts / Global Contacts
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9.1
Call Log
The Call Log lists Placed Calls, Missed Calls and Received Calls. That allows the user to see
which calls that are made in the past. The lists contain a maximum of 30 numbers and the
numbers are stored in these lists until the system is restarted. If the contacts listed are available
in the phone book, the names will be displayed instead of the numbers.
Placed Calls lists all outgoing calls, Missed Calls lists the calls that are not accepted and
Received Calls lists all incoming calls. The calls in the lists are marked with these icons:
outgoing calls
incoming calls
missed calls
The following buttons are available from these folders :
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now
Copy to My Contacts
Delete
Delete All
Cancel
How to make a call using the call lists:
1. Select a number from the list.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the selected contact. Alternatively, press the OK button when the contact is
selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with the name of the contact in
the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the call settings for this
contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call. The call will be set
up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
How to delete numbers in the call lists do one of the following:
ƒ
ƒ
Choose the Delete button to delete a selected contact from the call list.
Choose the Delete All button to delete all contacts listed in the call list.
Note that you will not delete contacts from the Phone Book if you delete them from the call lists.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.9.2
My Contacts
My Contacts are the locally stored contacts on the system. This means that it is possible to add
new contacts and edit or delete existing contacts. My Contacts can store up to 200 contacts.
How to make a call using My Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
Note that the telephone or video number and profile of the selected contact are displayed on
the bottom line.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The following functions are available from My Contacts:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now
New Contact
New MultiSite Contact
Edit Contact
Delete Contact
Close
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.9.2.1
Add New Contact
The New Contact function is available from My Contacts.
Add a new contact to My Contacts by:
1. Select the New Contacts button to open the New Contacts dialog box.
2. Enter Name by using the letter keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as letters. Toggle between capital letters and small letters by pressing the #
button on the remote control. The maximum name length is 30 characters. For numbers,
press the # button for one second.
3. Enter Number by using the number keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as numbers. The maximum number length is 60 numbers. Use a star as
separator in IP addresses. For letters, press the # button for one second.
4. Alter the default setting of Call Type if necessary.
5. Alter the default setting of Network if necessary.
6. Alter the default setting of Bandwidth if necessary. For bandwidth 2x64 kbps or 2x56
kbps, two numbers are required; see Default Call Settings for more details.
7. Alter the default setting of Restrict (56k) if necessary.
8. Press OK to save.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9.2.2
New MultiSite Contact
(Optional feature*)
The New MultiSite Contact function is available from My Contacts.
It is possible to pre-define the participants of a conference meeting as a MultiSite Contact. All
participants in the MultiSite Contact will then be connected automatically instead of having to call
the participants one by one.
My Contacts can hold up to 50 MultiSites Contacts. The MultiSite Contacts consist of participants
that are already stored in My Contacts.
It is possible to have up to a total of 6 video participants and 5 telephone participants in a
meeting.
How to define a New MultiSite Contact:
1. Open the Phone Book via the Phone Book button on the remote control or in the Make a
Call menu.
2. Select the New MultiSite Contact icon. The New MultiSite Contact dialogue box is
displayed.
3. Enter a name of the MultiSite Contact, and press OK on the remote control.
4. Select Add Participant. The content of the Local Phone Book is displayed. Find the
desired contact and press the OK button on the remote control. Repeat until all the
desired participants are selected.
5. Press OK to save the MultiSite Contact.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Bandwidth for a MultiSite Contact call
When calling a MultiSite Contact, the system will try to call the participants with their specified
bandwidths. If the total bandwidth exceeds the system's maximum bandwidth the system will
downspeed and distribute the available bandwidth equally among all the participants.
Example: In a MultiSite Contact there is one participant with bandwidth 256kbps and one
participant with bandwidth 384kbps. 512kbps is the maximum bandwidth of the system.
The two participants' bandwidth exceeds the maximum bandwidth. The system wills then
downspeed so that each participant connects with equal bandwidth, i.e. 512kbps/2 = 256kbps.
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9.2.3
Edit Contact
The Edit Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to edit a contact in the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact that is to be edited.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Edit
Contact icon is selected.
3. The current setting for this contact is displayed in a dialogue box. Alter the wanted
settings.
4. Press OK to save.
If the altered contact is part of a MultiSite Contact*, the contact will be updated in the MultiSite
Contact automatically.
* The MultiSite option is not available on all systems.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.9.2.4
Delete Contact
The Delete Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to delete a contact:
1. Select the contact that is to be deleted.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Delete
Contact icon is selected. The Delete Contact dialogue box is displayed.
3. Confirm by pressing the OK button again.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9.3
Corporate Contacts / Global Contacts
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the Global Contacts* or the
Corporate Directory** below the folders Placed Calls, Missed Calls, Received Calls and My
Contacts.
These contacts cannot be changed locally by the system, only from the management system. If
there is a need to modify the number or any settings of a contact before making a call, select the
contact and press OK on the remote control. The Make a Call menu is displayed and the settings
can be altered before placing the call. The changes are not saved.
How to make a call using Global Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys or use the search function described in Search.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
From Global Contacts the following functions are available:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Call Now
Up one Level
Search
Copy to My Contacts
Close
* The Global Contacts are stored locally on the ftp-server of the system. This will include the first 400 entries of the
Corporate Directory, and will not contain any folders. This directory is hidden from the user as long as the system is able
to fetch the Corporate Directory, otherwise the Global Contacts will be displayed.
** The Corporate Directory is available if the system is connected to an external management system like the TANDBERG
Management Suite (TMS) and if it is enabled in Phone Book Settings.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.9.3.1 Up one Level
Global Contacts can be arranged in a tree structure with several sub folders. Use the Up one
Level button to navigate up in the tree structure.
When a search in the Global Phone Book is made by using the Search function, only contacts
matching the search text are displayed. Select the Up one Level button to return back to the
alphabetical list.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.9.3.2
Search
The phone book can contain an unlimited amount of global contacts. Using search makes it
easier to find the wanted contact.
How to search in the Global Phone Book:
1. Select the Search icon.
2. Enter search text in the dialogue box that appears and press the OK button on the
remote control. The system will list all entries that contain the entered letter combination.
3. It is also possible to search on first letter in the Phone Book with the letter keys on the
remote control.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.9.3.3
Copy Contact to My Contacts
The Copy Contact to My Contacts function is available from the Placed Calls, Missed Calls,
Received Calls and Global Contacts folders, see Phone Book for details.
It may be wise to copy contacts that are often used to My Contacts. Note that the local copy will
not be updated if the Global Contacts are updated from the management system.
How to copy a contact from the Global Phone Book to the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact to be copied to My Contacts.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Copy
Contact to My Contacts icon is selected.
A message box telling that the operation was successful will be displayed.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.10 Camera Control
There are several ways to control the camera:
ƒ
Control the camera directly with the arrow keys when the menu is closed or use the Move
Camera function in the menu to control both the near end and far end camera, see Move
Camera and Far End Control for details.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Use the zoom button on the remote control will zoom the picture in (+) and out (-).
Use Camera Presets, see Camera Presets for details.
Adjust focus, brightness and whitebalance, see Picture Control for details.
Use Automatic Camera Tracking, see Camera Tracking for details.
Use the TANDBERG Tracker, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG
Tracker.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.10.1 Move Camera
It is possible to move the camera with the remote control or via the menu.
Moving the camera directly with the remote control
When the menu is hidden, the arrow keys will work on the camera. If the menu is displayed, press
the Cancel button on the remote control to hide it. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the
camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and
out.
Moving the Camera via the menu:
1. Select the Camera Control icon from the menu.
2. Select the Move Camera button in the Camera Control menu.
3. Use the arrow keys on the remote control to pan and tilt the camera.
4. Press OK when done.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.10.2 Far End Control
Far End Control allows you to control your conference partner’s camera. An example of when this
feature could be especially helpful is if it is not possible to see what a participant at the far end is
writing on their white board. Use Far End Control to move the far end camera and zoom closer on
the white board. Far End Camera Control is useful if e.g. it is not possible to see what a
participant at the far end is writing on their white board. Use Far End Control to move the far end
camera and zoom closer on the white board. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the camera,
and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and out.
You can also control your conference partner’s video sources and presets and even request a
snapshot from the far end side. Enabling Far End Control will put the system in Far End mode
and camera control, camera preset, presentation, and snapshot will work on the far end camera.
Far End Control only works when you are in a call and if the far end side supports H.281 (Far End
Camera Control). You can prevent others from controlling your system by setting Allow Far End
Camera Control to Off in Control Panel - General - Permissions, see Permissions for details.
How to use Far End control:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the menu.
2. Select the Far End Control icon. When far end camera control is selected an indicator will
appear and it is possible to control the far end camera, camera preset, presentation and
snapshot for the far end.
3. Deselect the Far End Control button to deactivate far end control mode. This may also be
done by pressing the Cancel or the OK button.
Far End Camera Presets
Far End Camera Presets work just like your own camera presets. When Far End is on, use the
number keys to activate far end camera presets. You are however not allowed to save far end
camera presets.
Far End Presentation
Pressing the Presentation key or choosing a presentation from the presentation menu while Far
End is on, will result in opening a far end presentation. Be aware of that the far end video sources
may not correspond with the buttons in the presentation menu. If you press Document Camera,
the far end side might have configured another video source on this input.
Request snapshot from the Far End
You can request a snapshot from the far end side. Put the system in Far End mode and press
Snapshot on the remote control to take a snapshot of the current far end video (current is default
snapshot source).
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.10.3 Camera Presets
Use camera presets to easily vary between predefined near end camera angles. This is useful
when pictures from many different camera angles have to be sent to the far end. E.g. in a
meeting there is a white board, a PC and a small meeting table. Use camera presets to move
between these camera perspectives in order to present the correct information to the participants
at the far end without having to move the camera manually every time. A preset is deactivated
when the camera is moved manually with the arrow keys.
Presets are available from the menu. When you are in a call you can also activate presets directly
from the remote control. You can save up to 15 presets. Each camera preset is able to store
camera angle, video source and audio source selection.
How to use preset directly from the remote control:
When you are in a call you can activate presets with just one press on the number keys on
remote control. The number keys will however not work as presets when you are in an input field,
in order to write numbers or letters.
1. Press a number on the remote control. The camera will move to the corresponding angle,
or video source, stored on that number.
How to use presets via the menu:
1. Select Camera Control - Display Presets in the menu.
2. Select the wanted preset with the arrow keys on the remote control and
press OK.
How to save a new preset directly from the remote control:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video source that you
would like to store as a preset.
2. Press a number on the remote control for 1 second to save the preset. It is possible to
store one camera preset on each of the number keys, 0-9, when storing camera presets
from the remote control. (Camera preset 10 is stored on the 0-key).
3. The new camera preset will overwrite any existing camera preset on that number.
How to save a new Preset via the menu:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video
source that you would like to store as a preset.
2. Select Camera Control - Save New Camera Preset in the menu.
3. Enter a number between 0 and 14 and press OK.
4. Type a name for the preset to make it easier to separate the different
presets.
5. Press Save. The new Camera Preset will overwrite any existing camera
preset on that number.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker
How to save presets for the TANDBERG Tracker:
1. Select which camera preset is to be used on the TANDBERG Tracker.
2. Move the camera to the desired position to store on the tracker.
3. Select Move Camera - Save New Preset in the menu.
4. All camera presets are accessible from the TANDBERG Tracker.
For more information, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG Tracker.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.10.5 Picture Control
Focus, Brightness and White balance are set for auto focus, auto brightness and auto white
balance by default. If you need to set focus, brightness and white balance manually, go to Picture
Control in the Camera Control menu.
Focus
Auto
Auto focus continuously updates the focus throughout the call. When moving
the camera, the system will use auto focus for 5 seconds to set the right focus
of the new camera position. After 5 seconds auto focus is turned off to prevent
continuous focus adjustments of the camera.
Manual
When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to adjust
the focus. The temporary focus will last until you move the camera again and
auto focus will take effect.
Camera Brightness
Auto
Auto brightness continuously updates the brightness of the camera picture.
Manual When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to manually
adjust the camera brightness. If brightness is set manually, the system will keep
this brightness level also when the camera is moved. When the user zoom or
move the camera and manual brightness is on, the indicator line should say
“Manual Brightness”.
White Balance
Auto
Auto white balance continuously updates the white balance.
Manual
When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to
manually adjust the white balance. The manual white balance has 10 steps. If
white balance is set manually, the system will keep this white balance also when
the camera is moved. When the user zoom or move the camera and manual
white balance is on, the indicator line should say “Manual White Balance”.
Monitor Brightness
Brightness Adjust monitor brightness left from 0-16.
Left
Brightness Adjust monitor brightness right from 0-16.
Right
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.10.6 Camera Tracking
Through Camera Tracking and the use of two or three microphones, the camera can
automatically position itself on the current speaker. Before using camera tracking, the camera
positions used must be stored at Preset 7 (Mic1), Preset 8 (Mic2) and/or Preset 9 (Mic3).
How to use Camera Tracking:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the Menu.
2. Enable Camera Tracking by choosing Camera Tracking. An indicator will appear on the
screen.
3. End Camera Tracking by deselecting the Camera Tracking button. Camera Tracking will
also end if you activate a camera preset or move the camera manually with the arrow
keys.
Example: You have placed Microphone 1 on the table. Where should you position the camera
for Preset 7?
The camera position stored at Preset 7 must be related to Microphone 1. Therefore all
participants who are located closest to Mic1 should be included in the Preset 7 camera
position etc. When camera tracking is activated and a person close to Mic1 speaks, Preset 7
will be automatically selected.
When activating another video source (for instance document camera), camera tracking will be
temporarily disabled until you re-select Main Camera or a Main Camera preset.
The camera tracking speeds may be altered in the Video Settings menu in Control Panel, see
Camera Tracking Mode for further details.
A Voice Detector makes the system more tolerant of noise and ensures the camera not to move
by noise such as paper shuffling, etc.
Note that pressing Mic Off will temporarily disable camera tracking until you turn on the
microphone again.
Please also note that the camera tracking will not work properly if using an Audio Science
Microphone.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.11 Presentation
The Presentation Functionality in the system enables you to show other available video sources
in addition to your Main Camera. This is perfect for meetings where you would like to show a
PowerPoint presentation, for example. You can even use arrow keys up and down on the remote
control to activate Page Up/Down on the PC (this only applies when using VNC).
Use Presentation outside a call to make a local presentation for the people in your own meeting
room. Use Presentation when you are in a call to make a presentation for the far end as well.
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the Presentation Key on the remote control.
The presentation key shows a predefined video source, PC is the default. It is possible to change
the presentation source in the Presentation menu. Choose Presentation from the Menu if you
want to select a video source manually. The Presentation Menu offers you all the available video
sources supported by your system.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.11.1 Presentation Key
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the presentation key on the remote control.
The presentation key is used to start and stop a presentation. The presentation key will display
PC (default*).
When holding the presentation key for 1 second, the presentation menu will be displayed. This
menu allows you to choose other video sources.
You can also find the Presentation button in the Menu on screen. Select Presentation button and
press OK on remote control.
The default presentation source can be permanently changed in Presentation Settings.
When using the presentation key, your presentation will be displayed as a Dual Stream, if
possible. If the call does not support a dual video stream, the presentation will display as main
video stream.
How to start and end a Presentation using the Presentation key:
1. Press the Presentation key. The video source that is set as presentation source is
displayed in full screen (PC is default). Remember to connect your PC to the codec in
advance.
2. Press the Presentation key again to end the presentation and go back to main camera.
* If available on your system.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.11.2 Presentation Menu
The Presentation menu offers you all available video sources; Main Camera, PC, Document
Camera, VCR, AUX and VNC. All these sources can be used as Main Video Stream or Dual
Video Stream (Duo Video / H.239). Not all systems has all video sources available, see Interfaces
for details.
Outside a call the presentation menu only contains Main Video Sources. In a call, the headers
Dual Video and Snapshot display in addition to Main Video (if the call supports Duo Video
/H.239). Use the up/down keys to change between video sources and headers. Start a Dual
Stream by selecting a Dual Video source. Close the Dual Stream by deselecting the video source
button.
Note that Dual Video Stream may not be available if the option is not installed, not supported
on your system or if already activated. Use the up/down keys to change between video source
and header.
For Snapshots, see Take New Snapshot and Display Snapshot.
How to change your main video source:
1. Choose the Main Video header from the Presentation menu.
2. Choose your desired video source and press OK.
How to show a presentation in addition to your main video (Dual Video Stream):
1. Select the Duo Video header.
2. Choose a dual video source and press OK.
3. Deselect the active video source button to end the presentation.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/VGA Input)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
Users often have their presentations on a laptop that is brought into the meeting room.
Remember to connect your PC to the codec before you press the Presentation button. Note that
the image will appear smoother on the system if your presentation is already displaying in full
screen on your PC prior to connecting your PC to the video system.
Plugging a PC into the system is made extremely simple through the PC Presenter, avoiding the
need for any additional hardware such as a projector, PC/Video converter or extra cables.
How to connect a PC to the codec with the DVI/VGA cable:
1. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to the PC Presenter (PC DVI-I in) connector on the codec.
2. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to your PC (VGA Output).
3. If you would like to use audio as part of the presentation, connect the headset jack on
your PC to the audio input on the PC presenter VGA cable.
4. When the PC is connected to the codec, hit the Presentation key to display the PC image
on the system.
If no PC image is displayed on your monitor, make sure that your PC is set to activate your VGA
output. On most laptop PCs you must press a special key combination to switch the PC image
from the PC screen to the video screen.
Note that the DVI/VGA input is compliant with VESA Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
and will be able to reconfigure the PC’s screen settings if it is currently configured to a VGA
format that the system doesn’t support.
Also note that you can use the DVI input to transmit high resolution images from document
cameras or other sources supporting the HD format 720p.
For details on formats supported on 'DVI-I in', please refer to Interfaces.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC
(Optional feature)
PC SoftPresenter is used to display PC images on your system without using a VGA cable (PC
Presenter). The system and your PC must be connected to the same LAN. In addition, VNC
(Virtual Network Computing) server software must be installed on the PC. Free software can be
downloaded from http://www.realvnc.com. Install the software by running the downloaded file.
How to configure the VNC Server software:
1. Select the following to setup VNC; Windows-Start\All Programs\Highlight
RealVNC\Hightlight VNC Server\Show User Properties
2. Select Accept Socket Connections.
3. Select Auto for Display Number. Display Number in the system must then have the value
0.
4. Enter a password in the Password-field. This must correspond with the VNC Settings on
your system.
How to show PC using the PC Soft Presenter and VNC:
1. Start the VNC software on your PC.
2. To use VNC, you must configure VNC Settings. Open VNC Settings in the Presentation
Settings menu in Control Panel.
3. Fill in the IP address of your PC, Display Number and Password.
4. Press Save.
5. When you now choose VNC as video source in the Presentation menu, you will see your
PC using VNC. If a PowerPoint presentation is being displayed then you can scroll
through the presentation by pressing the up and down arrows on the remote control. VNC
settings will go back to default when the system goes to standby.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
With Dual Stream you have the opportunity to show two different live video streams
simultaneously, main video and one additional source. This is handy when showing a
presentation. You see the live presentation and the live video of the presenter simultaneously.
When you start a presentation, Dual Stream starts automatically if both local and remote system
supports Dual Stream. If one of the systems does not support Dual Stream, no second video
stream will be established and your presentation will be shown as your main video.
Dual Stream is available on all systems with Natural Presenter Package installed. H.239 is the
new ITU standard defining how to send two video sources simultaneously.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
PC will appear as a Dual Video Stream in addition to main camera. End the Dual Stream
presentation by pressing presentation key again.
In Presentation Settings, you can set Presentation Start to Manual. That means that Dual Stream
will not start automatically.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
A dialog box appears where you can choose to show PC as Dual Video Stream or not. This is
handy if you not always want to use Dual Stream.
Dual Stream and Bandwidth
Using Dual Stream, the quality automatically downspeeds to the optimal bandwidth. This means
that you need higher quality to allocate enough bandwidth for the two video streams. Dual Stream
borrows bandwidth from main video stream. When Dual Stream is closed, the bandwidth is
returned to the main video.
Note that when selecting the Document Camera or PC, the system will automatically request floor
when connected to a MCU conference as MultiSite host* or connected to an external MCU.
* Not available on all systems.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot
The system can take a snapshot of your live video. Snapshot is handy when you are in a call with
a system that does not support Dual Stream. Use Snapshot to show a snapshot of your
presentation and continue the meeting with main camera.
How to use snapshot:
You find Take New Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
1. Select the Snapshot header.
2. Select Take New Snapshot and press OK to take a snapshot.
Snapshot is found on the Star key on the remote control.
1. Press Star and you take a snapshot of the current video source (current video is default
snapshot source). You can change the snapshot source in Control Panel - Presentation
Settings. Note that snapshot does not work when you are in an input field in the menu
(the star key is then used to write the star sign).
Note that Take New Snapshot is not possible when Dual Video Stream is activated and that
it is only available when you are in a call.
Note that the Snapshot feature uses H.261 Annex D and hence will not work when using
H.264 video compression
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.11.7 Display Snapshot
The system stores the last sent or received Snapshot. The snapshot is deleted automatically after
the call.
How to display snapshots:
1. To view a stored snapshot, first choose the Snapshot header.
2. Select Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
3. Press the Hide Snapshot button to deselect it.
4. When disconnecting the call, the stored snapshot will be erased.
Receiving snapshots:
1. When receiving a snapshot, the snapshot is displayed in full screen.
2. Press OK to exit from the snapshot. The last sent or received snapshot will be stored in
the graphics memory and erased once the call is disconnected.
Note that Display Snapshot is only available when you have a stored snapshot.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.12 Conference Services
A Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) enables several sites to participate in the same conference.
During an MCU conference, the status line will provide information about the conference.
Services contain the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Request Floor and Release Floor
Conference Layout
Terminal Names
Chair Control
Assign Floor and Release Floor from Participant
View Site and End View
Disconnect Participant
Terminate Meeting
More about Multisite (embedded MCU)
Text Chat
You can make a multipoint conference in different ways. The Conference Services vary
depending on how you make the call, see Add call for details.
Example of MultiSite for high end systems. Note that the illustrations may differ from the actual
product.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Example of MultiSite for mid- to low end systems. Note that the illustrations may differ from the
actual product.
TF *
Using the system’s internal MCU, MultiSite
Most TANDBERG MXP systems have an optional built-in MCU, which is called MultiSite*. It
supports up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls including yourself for high-end systems, and 4
video calls and 3 telephone calls including yourself for the mid- and lower end systems. The
MultiSite supports both Split Screen and Voice Switched mode. With MultiSite, you have the
following services:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
Terminal Names
Layout (Auto/4 Split/5+1 Split/Voice Switched)
Using an external MCU that supports Chair Control (H.243)
With an external MCU that supports H.243, you have the following services:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor
View Participant/End View
Chair Control
If you take Chair control, you get the following services:
ƒ
ƒ
Release Chair
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
ƒ
ƒ
Disconnect Participant
Terminate Meeting
Using an external MCU with limited Chair Control Support you may have the following
services
With an external MCU that does not support H.243, you have the following services:
ƒ
ƒ
Request/Release Floor
Terminal Names
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor
When requesting floor, your video will be broadcasted in full screen to all other participants in the
conference. Request Floor is useful when you want to speak or display something in front of all
participants.
Release Floor when you are done and make the floor available for other participants in the
conference. An indicator appears when you have floor and disappears when you release floor,
see floor indicator in On-screen Indicators.
How to use Request and Release Floor:
1. Open the Menu by pressing OK.
2. Choose Conference Services and press OK.
3. Choose Request Floor and press OK. A Floor indicator will appear when you have floor.
4. When done, press the same button again, which now means Release Floor. The Floor
indicator disappears.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.12.2 Conference Layout
(Only supported by TANDBERG MultiSite*)
With a TANDBERG MultiSite you can choose between the layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split
and Voice Switched view. Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. 4 Split
displays the 4 last speaking Participants including the MultiSite host. 5+1 Split displays the
speaking participant in a big picture and the other participants in small pictures. Voice Switched
mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen. Switch between these picture modes
using the Conference Layout menu.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Voice Switched mode
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.12.4 Chair Control
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)
As chairman, you have access to more MultiSite Services. Select Chair Control to assume the
role of chairman of the conference. Select Release Chair to end the role as chairman. A Chair
indicator appears when you have Chair and disappears when chair is released.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
3.12.6 View Site and End View
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)
View Site allows you to view any participant in the conference regardless of who has the floor and
chair. Choose End View to go back to normal.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant
Disconnect Participant allows the chairman to disconnect any participant in the conference. In a
multipoint call, this is equivalent to disconnecting a participant from the end call menu.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU)
(Optional Feature*)
Calling in to a MultiSite
Any system can be part of a MultiSite conference by calling in to a MultiSite. The dial-in numbers
to the MultiSite depends of the network that is used.
To dial in to the MultiSite on IP:
ƒ
Dial the IP Number or the IP Address of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-PRI:
Dial the ISDN number of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
ƒ
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-BRI:
ƒ
The MultiSite has specific numbers for each call that participates in the conference. To
find the dial-in numbers for the MultiSite, choose Information from the Menu and open
System Information from the bottom menu line.
Site 2 must dial MultiSite Number 2.
Site 3 must dial MultiSite Number 3.
Site 4 must dial MultiSite Number 4.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
And so forth
Receiving calls to a MultiSite
When the MultiSite receives incoming calls you can accept or reject it. Pressing the green key is
equivalent to pressing Accept. Pressing the red key is equivalent to pressing Reject.
End a MultiSite Call
Ending a MultiSite Call is not very different from ending a normal point-to-point call. Use the red
key on the remote control or End Call from the Menu. The end call menu lists all the calls that
participate in the conference. To end a single call, select the call, press OK or the red key on the
remote control. To end all calls, press the End All Calls button in the menu.
Duo Video in MultiSite calls
In a MultiSite call, the MultiSite can transmit the Duo Video and/or H.239 to the other participants
that support Duo Video and/or H.239. This means that any participant can send Dual Stream and
the MultiSite will transmit it to the other participants. The participants that do not support Duo
Video or H.239 will only receive Main Video or only the dual stream dependent on software
options installed.
Mix ISDN/IP
A conference can consist of any combination of ISDN/IP sites.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
MultiSite cascading
By connecting MultiSite systems together, it is possible to connect even more sites in a cascaded
MultiSite (see example below). All connections can use any combination of ISDN/IP. The host
can connect up to 5 other video systems with MultiSite functionality. The cascaded systems can
connect to 4 other video sites. These systems will automatically run Voice Switched mode and
transmit a full screen image to the host. In this case you get 26 participants in the cascaded
MultiSite conference.
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
3.12.10 Text Chat
While in an ISDN or IP call to another system supporting Text Chat (T.140), select Text Chat the
Services Menu. Enter text in the displayed window.
How to use Text Chat:
1. Choose Text Chat from the Services Menu to open the Text Chat window.
2. Enter text with the number keys like on a mobile phone. The text is sent to the far end
continuously letter by letter.
3. Press OK to end Text Chat and escape from the text chat window.
Note that Text Chat is supported in point to point calls only.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4 Control Panel
The Control Panel contains the following features:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
User Guide
Diagnostics
Audio Demo
Restart
Settings*
Settings:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
General
Call Quality
Security
Menu Settings
Audio
Network
Presentation Settings
Video
Restore Default Settings
NOTE: If Administrator Password is On, a Settings button will appear on the menu line together
with User Guide, Diagnostics, Audio Demo and Restart. When you press the Setting button you
are prompted with a password message box. For more information, see Control Panel – Security
– Administrator Password.
* This field is only visible if the Administrator Password is On.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.2 Diagnostics
Diagnostics allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system
settings.
Diagnostics contain:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System Information
Channel Status
Call Status
System Selftest
View Settings
IP Address Conflict Check
Warnings
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
4.2.1
System Information
Select System Information to view system numbers, line status, software version, hardware serial
number and other useful information. Press arrow key up and down to scroll in the System
Information list.
System Information contains:
System Name
My ISDN Number
My IP Number
Software Version
Internal Test
Software
Network
Lines active
Lines not active
Hardware Serial
Number
MAC address
Ethernet Speed
My IP Address
Options installed
MultiSite number 2
MultiSite number 3
Note that the serial number is also found on a sticker on the system. It is essential for identifying
the system when it comes to service contracts or other support activities. The serial number
format is xx.xxxxx.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.2.2
Channel Status
Comprehensive information about the call progress is available through the Channel Status
window. This window indicates the various stages each B-channel goes through whilst
establishing a connection.
Status -
BRI
Comments
Idle
the channel is idle
Calling
Connected
Sync
when calling — the network has acknowledged the call
when connection is established
when the channels are synchronized
Active
Releasing
Released
when all available channels are connected
waiting for the network to confirm a release of the call
when disconnected - the network has acknowledged the disconnection
Cause codes
The most common cause codes (for ISDN) are:
1
2
Unallocated (unassigned) number
No route to specified transit network (WAN)
Normal clearing
User busy
No user responding
Call rejected
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
Facility rejected
Normal, unspecified
No circuit/channel available
Temporary failure
Bearer capability not presently available
Bearer service not implemented
Requested facility not implemented
Invalid call reference value
Incompatible destination
16
17
18
21
28
29
31
34
41
58
65
69
81
88
100 Invalid information element contents
102 Recovery on timer expiry
127 Internetworking, unspecified
255 TANDBERG specific. undefined cause code
PRI Red Alarm
Red alarm or Loss of signal (LOS) means that there is no signal and thus no framing info
received (this has same effect as pulling out the PRI cable).
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
PRI Yellow Alarm
Yellow alarm or Remote Alarm Indicator (RAI) means that the system is receiving framing info,
but in this framing info the other side tells the system that it is not reading the system’s
transmitted framing info. Typically, this may be a broken connector in the TX part of the system
PRI cable. This could also indicate weak or noisy signal in the TX part of the system PRI cable.
PRI Blue Alarm
Blue alarm means that network on the far side of the CSU is unavailable.
Example:
The system is connected via a CSU (i.e. a Channel Services Unit’) as follows: System–
cableA–CSU–cableB–Network
If a CSU loses framing/sync from the network (example: a bad cable B), it shall no longer
send valid framing out on cable A towards the system. Instead it transmits "Blue Alarm".
Seen from a system receiving blue alarm, this means that the network on the far side of the
CSU is unavailable.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.2.3
Call Status
Comprehensive information about the call is available through the Call Status window. The menu
has two columns, one for transmitted and one for received audio/video/data information. If Dual
Stream or MultiSite is available on your system and in use, pressing the UP/DOWN keys will
show one page per connected site. Some of the information fields will vary dependent on if H.320
(ISDN calls) or H.323 (IP calls) are made.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.2.5
View Settings
This window displays all the system settings. Use the arrow key on the remote control to scroll
through the list.
View Settings may contain*:
General Settings
System Name
Language
Dual Monitor
Auto answer
Max Call Length
Access Code
Incoming MCU calls
Incoming Telephone calls
Far End Control
Fallback to Telephony
Screen Settings
TV Monitor Format
Picture Layout
VGA Monitor Format
VGA Out Quality
PC Picture Format
Allow VGA 50Hz
Software Options
Menu Settings
Options Installed
Serial Number
Current Option Key
Menu Timeout in Call
Welcome Menu
Welcome Picture
Logo
Balloon Help
Display Welcome Text
Welcome Text
Administrator Password
Presentation Settings
Duo Video Mode
Start up Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto Display Snapshot
PIP Placing
H.323 Presentation Rate
VNC Settings
Video Quality
Address
Display Number
Call Quality
Video Algorithm
Audio Algorithm
Interlaced
Main Camera
PC
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Document Camera
VCR
AUX
VNC
Split Screen
Default Call Settings
Call Type
Network
Bandwidth
Restrict (56k)
Auto H320 Bandwidth
Auto H323 Bandwidth
SIP
Audio Settings
Inputs
Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Mix Mode
VCR Ducking
Level Settings
Outputs
Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Out1 Mode
Level Settings
Echo Control
Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio Leveling (AGC)
Alert Tones & Volume
Mics
Audio5 (AUX)
Audio6 (VCR)
Received Audio
Video Call Alert Tone
Telephone Alert Tone
Alert Volume
Alert Speaker
Key Tones
Video Settings
Picture Control
Camera Tracking Mode
MCU Status Line
Web Snapshot
MultiSite Picture Mode
Focus
White balance
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Brightness
Video Name
Main Cam
AUX
Doc Cam
VCR
PC
VGA
VNC
Network Type
ISDN-BRI\PRI\Leased E1\T1\Exnternal
H331
ISDN Switch Type ETSI (Euro ISDN)
Line1 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line2 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line3 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Advanced ISDN Settings
Sub address
Validate Numbers (MSN)
Parallel Dial
Send Own Numbers
Sending Complete
ISDN-PRI Settings
Channel Hunting
Number Range
ISDN-PRI Switch Type
Max Channels
Low Channel
High Channel
Search High, Low
Line Settings:
T1 Cable Length 1
E1 CRC-4
Advanced ISDN PRI Settings
Leased E1/T1 Settings
NSF Code Video
NSF Code Telephone Call
Call Control
Network Interface
Max Channels
Start Channels
T1 Line Coding
Line Settings
External network configuration Call Control RS66
RS449/V.35 Compatible
IP Settings
IP assignment
IP address
IP subnet mask
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Gateway
Ethernet Speed
DNS Settings
H.323 Settings
E.164 Alias
Use Gatekeeper
Gatekeeper IP
H.323 Prefix
Advanced H.323 Settings
IP Precedence
RSVP
NAT
NAT Address
QoS
Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
IP Type of Service (TOS)
Diffserv
Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
IEEE802.1x Settings
IEEE802.1x
Mode
Anonymous Identity
Identity
EAP-MD5
EAP-TTLS
EAP-PEAP
SNMP Settings
IP Services
SNMP Trap Host1
SNMP Trap Host2
SNMP Trap Host3
SNMP Community
IP Services
HTTPS
NTP IP
IP Address
Streaming Settings
Address
Address Port
TTL/Router Hops
Streaming Source
Allow Remote Start
Announcements
Video rate (kbps)
Network Profiles
Auto
H.320
H.323
Network Profile 4
Network Profile 5
Network Profile 6
Security
Encryption
Encryption mode
Passwords
Camera Standby Mode
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Data Port 1
Data Port 2
Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
* The Settings available will vary within the MXP system range depending on system and what software options installed.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.2.7
Warnings
Any warnings registered by the system will be displayed in the Warnings menu. Open a warning
in the list to get more information about the warning.
The following warnings may be displayed if detected by the system, depending on system type
and configuration:
ISDN BRI warnings
ƒ
ISDN is enabled on BRI line x, but the line is not connected. Please check your network
connection or disable the line. (101)
ƒ
There is something wrong with ISDN BRI line x. Please check your network connection.
(102)
IP network quality warnings
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The system is experiencing, equal to or more than 5%, packet loss in the IP network.
This may affect the quality of the call.
The system is experiencing high jitter, equal to or more than 200 ms, in the IP network.
This may affect the quality of the call.
The system is dropping IP packets due to latency in the network. This may affect the
quality of the call.
ISDN PRI warnings
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ISDN PRI is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check your
network connection or disable the network. (131)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (132)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (133)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (D-Channel not active). Please check
your network connection. (134)
External Network warnings
External Network is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please
check your network connection or disable the network. (161)
ƒ
Leased E1/T1 warnings
ƒ
Leased E1/T1 is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check
your network connection or disable the network. (191)
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (192)
ƒ
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
ƒ
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (193)
H323 gatekeeper warnings
ƒ
ƒ
Could not register to the gatekeeper.
The gatekeeper rejected to register the system. Another system is already registered with
the same alias or H.323 ID.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
The max capacity on the gatekeeper is reached. Registration failed.
Tried to register to the gatekeeper without a valid alias. Registration failed.
The system is not allowed to register with this gatekeeper.
Can not find the gatekeeper. Check the gatekeeper configurations on the system.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
4.3 Audio Demo
TANDBERG systems are designed to improve audio quality during a video conference – as if the
person is in the same room!
Demonstrate the high quality Audio of your system by pressing the Audio Demo button at the
bottom of the Control Panel menu. Lean back and enjoy!
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
4.4 Restart
Restart the system by pressing the Restart button. You are prompted with a dialog box saying:
Do you want to restart the system? Press OK to restart, press Cancel (X) to abort.
You will also find the Restart button at the bottom of the Control Panel menu.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5 System Settings
The Control Panel contains all the settings of the system. Making changes to the settings will
change the behavior of the system. It is recommended to password protect the access to the
settings to prevent occasional users from making crucial changes to the system, see Control
Panel – Security – Administrator Password.
NOTE: The System Settings can be password protected by setting an Administrator Password.
The settings are hidden and a settings button appears on the menu line. Whenever you press the
Settings button you will be prompted to enter a five digit pin code to access the Settings menu.
System Settings contain:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
General
Menu Settings
Presentation Settings
Call Quality
Audio
Video
Security
Network
Restore Default Settings
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.1 General Settings
When installing the system, go through the General Settings menu to ensure that you have the
right settings for your system, see System Configuration.
General Settings contain:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Language
System Name / International Name*
Auto Answer
Phone Book Settings
External Service Settings
Permissions
Screen Settings
Software Options
Date and Time Settings
* This field is only visible if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.1
Language
The system supports 16 different languages for its on-screen menus; English, German, French,
Norwegian, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian, Finnish, Chinese Simplified, Chinese
Traditional, Japanese, Korean, Thai and Arabic. Select the preferred language and press OK to
save.
Note that pressing the Phone Book button 5 times followed by the number button 1 on the remote
control will reset the menu language to English.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.1.2
System Name
System Name identifies the system:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
On the welcome page.
During an MCU conference call.
When using the Web-interface.
When the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.
Towards a DHCP server.
H323 ID. Other systems can call in using this name instead of IP-number/IP-address.
System Name is blank by default. System name can be alphanumeric and up to 50 characters
long. Follow the installation procedure to enter a System Name.
Note that if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input, the
International Name using Latin characters only, must be specified as well.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.3
International Name
If the System Name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input, the International Name
using Latin characters only, must be specified as well. This is in order to make other systems
understand the system name.
This field is only visible if the system name contains Asian and non-Latin character text input.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.1.4
Auto Answer
The auto answer setting decides whether an incoming call is put through automatically or
manually.
On
The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.
On+Mic
Off
The system will automatically answer all incoming calls and switch the
microphone off when the call is connected. Press Mic Off to switch the
microphone on.
Off
You must manually answer all incoming calls by pressing OK or the Call key.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.5
Phone Book Settings
Corporate Directory
On
Off
The Corporate Directory is available in the menu.
The Corporate Directory is hidden from the menu and is unavailable for users.
IP address
Enter the IP address of the management system that provides the Phone Book.
Path
The Path indicates the function of the management system.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.1.6
External Services Settings
External Services
On
Off
When set to On External Services are available.
When set to Off External Services are unavailable.
IP address
Enter the IP address of the service provider for External Services.
Path
Enter the Path to the External Services provider.
The services available are defined by the service provider.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.7
Permissions
Permissions contains settings for incoming MCU Calls, incoming telephone Calls, Far End
Control, Remote Software Upgrade and Fallback to Telephony.
Access Code
An access code will help you control the use of the system. All users must enter a code to identify
themselves and the call will be charged on their account. Access Codes are handy for group
systems where there are more users or divisions that share the costs of using the system. Access
Code can be set to "On" and "Off". Please refer to section Appendix 5 for more information on
Access codes.
On
Off
When making a call, an Access Code dialog box will be shown. The user must enter
the correct password in order to put the call through.
No password is necessary to make a call.
Incoming MCU Calls
On
Off
When you are in a call, the system will provide visual and audible indications of an
incoming call and ask you to accept/reject the call.
The system will not accept incoming calls when you are in a call.
Incoming Telephone Calls
On
Off
The system will accept incoming telephone calls.
The system will not accept incoming telephone calls. This is useful to prevent
incoming calls from systems other than videoconferencing systems.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Far End Camera Control
On
Off
The far end will be able to:
• Control your camera
• Select your video sources
• Activate your camera presets
• Request snapshots
The far end can access none of the four features above on the local system. You will
however still be able to control the camera on the far end.
Fallback to Telephony
When dialing a number and the system fails to place a video call to the number dialed, the
system will attempt to place a telephone call if Fallback to Telephony is enabled.
On
Off
Enables fallback from video calls to telephone calls.
Disables fallback.
Far End ISDN System Upgrade
It is possible to upgrade software remotely, i.e. a far end system may upgrade software on a local
system via http on ISDN. The system to be upgraded must be configured to allow remote
software upgrade. It is possible to set a password which is needed for the far end system to be
able to accomplish the software upgrade.
On
Off
The system will allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
The system will not allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
Note that the configuration can also be done via the telnet or the serial port.
Maximum Call Length (minutes)
This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the call time exceeds
the specified Max Call Length. Max Call Length can have the following values: 0-999 (minutes),
where 0 means off.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.8
Screen Settings
Auto Layout
On
If Auto Layout is On the system will change layouts automatically depending on the
number of participants in a call and if you have a dual video stream or not. Please
refer to Layout for more information.
Off
If Auto Layout is Off there will be no automatic layout changes during a call. All
desired layout changes must be done manually.
Note that when you receive low resolution images (176x144 pixels or less) the screen will
automatically adjust to a smaller view to give optimum quality experience.
Use Screen as Local PC Monitor
Use the Selfview button to switch from local PC display to standard conference layout.
On
Off
If Local PC Display is On you will be able to have Local PC displayed both outside
a call and in a call.
If Local PC Display is Off you will not be able to see a Local PC image.
Note that this applies to single monitor systems only.
Please refer to Local PC Display for more information.
Dual Monitor
TANDBERG systems can be used with both one and two monitors. If you use two monitors, make
sure that Dual Monitor is set to "On".
On
Off
Selfview, snapshots and Dual Stream will be displayed on the second monitor.
The second monitor shows selfview only.
Picture Layout
The Advanced Picture Layout is related to the Layout button on the remote control and it can be
used at any time to change the screen layout. For wide screen systems POP mode is
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
recommended. You will get optimized picture layouts for wide screen by pressing the Layout
button on the remote.
Picture in
Picture (PIP)
Pressing the Layout button on the remote will result in an extra picture in
smaller view (Picture in Picture). Press the Layout button to move it around
in the corners of the screen and finally hide it. Pressing and holding Layout
for 1 second will hide the small picture directly from any position.
Picture
outside
Picture
(POP)
Press the Layout button to see the images side-by-side, e.g. 1+1 layout,
where the far end and near end are displayed as images of equal size, see
figure below.
Press the Layout button once more to change to 1+2 layout. The far end
image will be displayed as the main video, with the near end, usually the
user of the system, as a smaller image in the upper right corner. If Duo
Stream is used, the Dual Stream image is displayed as the main image and
the far end and near end as smaller images to the right, see figure below for
an example.
Press the Layout button again to get the 1+3 layout.
The next time the Layout button is pressed, the normal full screen view of
the far end is displayed. Pressing and holding Layout for 1 second will
always bring you back to full screen.
Example of Picture in Picture.
Example of 1+1 Side-by-Side view (wide screen).
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Example of 1+2 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
Example of 1+3 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
Note that if both TV monitor format and VGA format is set to Normal, the system will
skip the 1+3 layout, which is not beneficial for 4:3 monitors.
Note that the following menu settings do not apply for all TANDBERG MXP systems. Please
refer to the actual menu page on your system.
TV Monitor Format (wide screen monitors only)
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the TV
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your TV monitor is a
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. All composite- and s-video output formats will then be
optimized for Wide Screen TV monitors.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal TV monitors (4:3)
Wide
Output format is optimized for Wide TV monitors (16:9)
VGA Monitor Format
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the VGA
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your VGA monitor is a
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. The VGA and DVI output will then be optimized for Wide
Screen VGA and High Definition (HD) display.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal VGA monitors (4:3)
Wide
Output format is optimized for Wide VGA monitors (16:9)
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor in Normal (stretched) mode.
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor In Wide (native) mode.
VGA Out Quality*
The supported range of VGA formats will be optimized for the VGA display monitor based on the
source image.
VGA Out Quality enables the user to change the preferred format for the DVI/VGA output. It is
recommended to keep this setting in Auto unless your screen doesn’t support some of the XGA
or SVGA formats the system is using. Note that the VGA Out port support VESA Power
Management.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Auto
VGA output format will be optimized dependant of the video source format,
refresh and of the EDID information available.
Supported formats are:
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz / 75Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
SVGA 800x600
75Hz
VGA output format is forced to SVGA format (800x600) 75Hz
VGA output format is forced to XGA format (1024x768) 60Hz
XGA 1024x768
60Hz
VGA Out Quality for Wide XGA:
If VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide, PC Picture Format is set to Normal, VGA Out
Quality is set to Auto, the layout on the monitor is either fullscreen or POP, and the
input source to the largest window is PC with resolution 1024x768, the system will use
WideXGA (1280x768) instead of XGA, when the monitor supports this.
PC Picture Format (wide screen monitors only)
PC Picture Format setting only takes effect when TV or VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide. Use
this setting to determine if you want your PC presentations to be shown stretched in full screen,
or with correct aspect ratio using part of the widescreen display. With the VGA Out Quality set to
Auto the presentation will be of the best possible quality supported by the monitor.
Normal VGA output will have 4:3 aspect ratio on wide screen monitor.
Wide
VGA output will utilize the wide screen monitor at full.
PC presentation shown in Normal (correct ratio) mode.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
PC Presentation shown in Wide (stretched) mode.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.1.9
Software Options
The system requires a valid option key to activate MultiSite and/or Presenter functionality. In
order to activate additional bandwidth, you need to enter a bandwidth key. A restart of the system
is required after entering a new option and/or bandwidth keys. If the key is invalid, the original key
will be used.
The following options are available:
1. No option
2. Presenter
3. MultiSite + Presenter
4. Bandwidth options
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.1.10 Date and Time Settings
NTP IP
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.
See IP Services for more details.
Auto
The NTP IP will be provided by the DHCP server.
Manual The NTP IP address is set manually.
IP Address
The IP Address for obtaining the date and time information.
Time Zone
Select the correct time zone for the location of your system.
Date Format
Choose between DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/YY, or YY/MM/DD as the desired date format.
Time Format
Select 12h or 24h time format.
Daylight Savings
On
Off
Moves the time 1 hour ahead.
Moves the time 1 hour back..
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.2 Menu Settings
Menu Settings contain the settings:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Input Editor Language
Menu Timeout In Call
Menu on TV
Menu on PC
Balloon Help
Number Key Mode
Administrator Password
Kiosk Mode Settings
Startup
Icons
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.2.1
Input Editor Language
When the Input Editor Language is set to Chinese, Korean or Japanese the user will be able to
enter Chinese / Korean / Japanese characters into an input field like the System Name or Phone
Book, using the remote control.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.2.2
Menu Timeout in Call
The Menu appears on the bottom line of the screen. Set Menu Timeout in Call to On if you want
the menu to time out automatically when you are in a call.
On
The menus will time out automatically after 15 seconds if there is no activity on the
remote control. Menu timeout does only apply when you are in a call. Outside a call,
the menu will not time out.
Off
The menu will not time out automatically. Press Cancel (X) to hide the Menu
manually.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.2.3
Menu on TV
The Menu on TV setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the TV screen or not. For
optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice versa.
On
Off
The menu is available on the TV screen.
The menu is not available on the TV screen.
Note that if the menu has disappeared from the connected monitor or PC screen and only one of
them is connected to the system, it is possible to press the Phone Book 5 times and then the
number button 2 in order to display the menu on the connected screen.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.2.4
Menu on PC
The Menu on PC setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the PC (VGA screen) screen
or not. For optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice
versa.
On
Off
The menu is available on the PC screen.
The menu is not available on the PC screen.
Note that if the menu has disappeared from the connected monitor or PC screen and only one of
them is connected to the system, it is possible to press the Phone Book 5 times and then the
number button 2 in order to display the menu on the connected screen.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.2.6
Number Key Mode
When pressing a number key on the remote control, while in a call, the user can decide what
shall happen. The system can be configured to act automatic or manual.
While in a call, the user presses a number key to:
•
•
•
add another call
dial extension numbers
use camera presets
Setting Number Key to Automatic:
Some users want the camera presets as the default action when pressing a number key, when in
a call. The number keys can be configured to always act like this; or to act in accordance to any
of the other available choices.
Setting Number Key to Manual:
Sometimes, when you are in a call, you need to switch between adding another call, dial
extension numbers or use camera presets. Then you would want the system to give you a choice
of what to do. If you configure the Number Key Mode to Manual you can select the preferred
action when pressing a number key.
The Number Key Mode are available from Menu Settings and the default setting is Manual. See
Control Panel – Menu Settings – Number Key Mode.
TIP: You can always press “Touch Tones” on the remote control to enter an extension number,
password or access code while in a call.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The Number Key Mode is set to Manual
Settings for Remote Control Number Keys while in a call:
Add Call
While in a call, the Call Menu will automatically appear when a number key is
pressed on the remote control.
This will enable the user to add another call.
Touch tones
While in a call, the Touch Tones Mode will automatically become active when a
number key is pressed on the remote control.
This will enable the user to dial extension numbers, access codes, passwords,
etc.
Presets
While in a call, the Camera Preset Mode will automatically become active when a
number key is pressed on the remote control.
The camera will move to the position preset for the number key used. If users
want the system to behave like before, set the setting to “Presets”.
Manual
(default)
While in a call, the Number Menu will appear every time the number key is
pressed on remote control. The user can choose between the options available,
dependent of the system.
For more information, see chapter, 3.2.8.2 Manual Number Key Mode.
5.2.6.1 Manual Number Key Mode
The pop-up menu will look slightly different based on the options installed at the system and
whether you have stored camera presets or not.
Press a number key, while in a call, when having MultiSite and stored presets:
A dialog box appears offering the options:
•
•
•
Add a Call
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode
Use Presets -> Go to Camera Presets mode
-> Go to Call menu
Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK on the remote control to select the desired entry.
Presets mode:
If you have selected Use Presets, you put the system in Preset mode. That means that all
number key presses will select presets. An indicator text says “Select Presets 0-9. Press OK
when done”.
Press a number key while in a call, when having MultiSite but no stored presets:
A dialog box appears offering the options:
•
•
Add a Call
-> Go to Call menu
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
If you have no stored presets on your system, you are likely not to use presets. Therefore the
presets option is not present in the dialog box. Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK
on the remote control to select the desired entry.
Press a number key while in a call, when having no MultiSite and having stored presets:
A dialog box appears offering the options:
•
•
Dial Extension Number -> Go to Touch Tones Mode
Use Presets -> Go to Camera Presets mode
If you don’t have MultiSite (or you have used all your MultiSite capacity), the Add Call option is
not present in the dialog box. Press arrow key to navigate in the list. Press OK on the remote
control to select the desired entry.
Press a number key while in a call, when having no MultiSite and no stored presets:
You go directly to Touch Tones Mode because no other options are available. In Touch Tones
Mode (DTMF) the user can dial extension numbers, access codes, passwords, etc.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.2.7
Administrator Password
It is recommended to put an Administrator Password on the system. The Administrator Password
can be maximum 5 digits long.
The Administrator Password dialog box will pop up when you choose Settings from the Control
Panel. This will prevent occasional users from going in to the system settings.
With an administrator password, you can ensure that your system will behave in the same way
every time and that only approved people are allowed to make changes to the system.
The Control Panel will look like this when Administrator Password is set:
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.2.8
Kiosk Mode Settings
Kiosk Mode
In Kiosk Mode the system is set to a simplified state where it can be controlled with just the four
arrow keys and OK. You will get a simplified on-screen menu with only basic functionality
available:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
make calls (using predefined contacts in the phone book)
receive calls
end calls
adjust volume
NOTE! Deactivating the Kiosk Mode is only possible through:
•
•
The web interface, telnet or data port, or
By pressing the Phone Book symbol 5 times and the number 3 key on the remote
control. Requires that "Allow Use of Remote Control" set to On.
Using Kiosk Mode
Outside a call the Welcome Menu will be displayed:
Place a Call, Volume and Close.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
If Language Menu is enabled you will first see the language selection menu. Select language and
the Welcome Menu will be displayed with your desired language.
In a call, the system will display Far End video in full screen. If Max Call Length is set to a value
and the system is in a call, the system will display a warning when it is 5 minutes, 1 minute and
10 seconds left of the call. If pressing OK when the system is in a call, the following menu will be
displayed: End Call, Volume and Close.
The following Kiosk Mode settings allow you to make some adjustments to the system's behavior
in Kiosk Mode.
Kiosk Mode - Language Menu
On
Off
When On the system will display the language menu as the first menu in kiosk mode.
When Off the system will display the welcome menu in English (default).
Kiosk Mode - Available Languages
In Kiosk Mode the system supports 7 different languages for its simplified on-screen menu;
English, German, French, Norwegian, Swedish, Italian and Spanish. Select the preferred
language.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Kiosk Mode - Auto Dial*
On
The system will automatically dial to the first contact in the Phone Book when he
handset is lifted. If this contact is busy, the system will call the second number in the
Phone Book and so on. If the user places the handset in the cradle, the system will
switch to Speaker Mode. Only the Far End system can end the call.
Off
The system will not make a call automatically when the handset is lifted.
* Applies only to systems with handset
Kiosk Mode - Allow Use of Remote Control
Yes All keys on the remote control are enabled.
No
All keys except the arrow keys and OK key are disabled.
Kiosk Mode - Phone Book
Local
The system will use the Local Phone Book in Kiosk Mode.
Corporate
The system will use the Corporate Directory in Kiosk Mode.
Kiosk Mode - Kiosk Menu
On
The Kiosk Mode menus will appear on the screen.
Off
No menus or indicators will appear on the screen.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.2.9
Startup
Welcome Menu
The Welcome Menu contains the Menu, System Status, your System Name and dial in numbers.
On
Off
The Welcome Menu is shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
The Welcome Menu is not shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
Press the OK button to open the welcome menu.
Welcome Picture
The Welcome Picture is what you see in the background of the welcome menu.
Selfview
Off
Selfview is shown in the background of the welcome menu. In most cases this
means that main camera is displayed and you can see the video image of
yourself.
No picture is shown in the background of the welcome menu.
Logo
It is possible to upload a company logo to the system. For more information about how to upload
a Logo, see Appendix 6. Set the Logo settings to On to display the logo.
On
Off
Choose On if you want the company logo to appear in the background of the
welcome menu.
The logo is not displayed.
Note: The TANDBERG Logo will be displayed if no other company logo is loaded and logo is
enabled.
Display Welcome Text
The welcome text displays your system name and dial in numbers by default. It is possible to hide
this information by choosing Display Welcome Text Off.
On
Welcome text is displayed on the welcome menu.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Off
Welcome text is not displayed on the welcome menu.
Welcome Text
You can change the welcome text to any text you like, instead of the default text. Remember that
Display Welcome Text must be On to be able to edit the welcome text.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.3 Presentation Settings
Presentation Settings contain:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Presentation Start
H.239
Startup Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto-Display Snapshot
PIP Placing
Presentation Rate
VNC Settings
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.3.1
Presentation Start
If your system has Dual Stream capabilities, you can show two video streams at the same time
(see also Dual Stream). Presentation Start is Auto by default. This means that you will start Dual
Stream (a second video stream) automatically when starting a presentation. Dual Stream requires
the Presenter Option and H.263 video. To check which options are installed, see the System
Information menu in Control Panel.
Manual means that you manually choose if you want to start Duo Video or not every time you
start a presentation.
Auto
Dual Stream starts automatically when you start a presentation (in other words,
when you choose a second video source). If your system or the far end system is
not capable of Duo Video/H.239, you will not use Dual Stream, but rather send the
presentation source as your Main Video
Manual When starting a presentation, select Presentation in the call menu and select Start
Presentation. Choose a video source from the list displayed on the screen.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.3.2
H.239
H.239 supports transmission of two video streams. It combines elements of Duo Video and
People+Content. If H.239 is disabled you will still be able to start TANDBERG Dual Video
Stream*
Enabled
Disabled
Enables H.239
Disables H.239
* The TANDBERG 550 MXP can only receive Dual Video Stream.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.3.3
Startup Video Source
The Startup Video Source is the video source on display when the system wakes up from
standby mode. If you use Main Camera as start up source, the system will start with Main
Camera every time the system wakes up from standby, regardless of what the previous user was
using.
You can change Startup Video Source to Main Camera, PC, Document Camera, VCR, AUX,
VNC or Current depending on what video sources you have available for your system. Choosing
Current will result in the last used video source before the system went to standby.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.3.4
Presentation Source
The Presentation Source is connected to the Presentation button on the remote. Pressing the
Presentation button will put the Presentation Source on display. Presentation Source is PC by
default*. You can change the Presentation Source to any video source and none. Choosing none
results in opening the Presentation menu when pressing the Presentation key.
* Only for systems with the PC video input available.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.3.5
Snapshot Source
When you take a Snapshot, you get a snapshot of the Snapshot Source. Current is the default
Snapshot Source. This means that you take a snapshot of the video source that is currently
active.
You can change the Snapshot Source to any video source. In this way you can program the
snapshot key to apply only for PC for instance. Press Snapshot and you will take a PC snapshot
regardless of what video source that is currently active.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.3.6
Auto-Display Snapshot
Select Auto to automatically display a received snapshot. Turn Auto-Display Snapshot Manual if
you wish not to have them displayed on the screen when they are sent or received. The
snapshots will be sent and received, but not displayed. With Auto-Display Snapshot set for
Manual, you must enter the Presentation menu to display a snapshot.
Auto
A sent or received snapshot will automatically be displayed on the screen.
Manual A sent or received snapshot will not be displayed on the screen. To see the
snapshot, choose Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.3.7
PIP Placing
PIP Placing lets you decide where the PIP shall appear. You can of course move the PIP with the
Layout button on the remote anytime.
Top Right
PIP is placed in the Top Right corner.
PIP is placed in the Bottom Right corner.
PIP is placed in the Bottom Left corner.
PIP is placed in the Top Left corner.
Bottom
Right
Bottom
Left
Top Left
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.3.8
Presentation Rate
When setting up a call with H.323 the bandwidth can be controlled by the user.
The Presentation Rate is expressed in percent of the Call Rate and shall reflect the H.323
Presentation Rate settings of the sender.
The settings are 25%, 50% and 75% of the total available video stream.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.3.9
VNC Settings
VNC Settings is necessary when using a VNC presentation. See the chapter PC Soft Presenter
and VNC for more information on how to use VNC.
Address
The IP-address of the PC with the VNC software installed. To find the IP-
address of the PC, place the mouse pointer on the VNC program icon in the
lower right corner of the Windows taskbar. You can also select Command
Prompt from the Startup-menu\Run and type cmd then enter. This will open a
command window and from here. Type “ipconfig” and press enter.
Display
Number
The display number for VNC is 0 and upwards. If you are using WinVNC,
double-click on the icon on the taskbar to view WinVNC properties. This
number should correspond with Display Number in this menu.
Password
Enter the same password as specified in WinVNC properties. The password
will be shown as asterisk signs (*) the next time you enter the menu.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.4.1
Video Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best video algorithm based on the video source and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable video algorithms in case you have
interoperability issues calling other systems.
H.264
H.263
H.261
Bandwidth efficient video compression and decompression.
Normal video compression and decompression.
Legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always have H.261
enabled. Therefore it is impossible to uncheck H.261.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.4.2
Audio Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best audio algorithm based on the call rate and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable audio algorithms in case you want to
remove “low quality” audio, or if you have interoperability issues calling other systems.
G.722
G.728
G.711
High quality audio (7 kHz at 48kbps, 56kbps or 64kbps)
Compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz at 16kbps)
Normal quality audio (telephone quality 3.1kHz at 64kbps). This audio algorithm is
mandatory for video conferencing equipment and is impossible to uncheck.
G.722.1 Compressed high quality audio (7 kHz at 24kbps, 32kbps and 48kbps).
AAC-
LD
CD-quality audio, MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay (20 kHz, stereo at
128kbps, mono at 64kbps).
Call Rate vs Audio algorithms selected
Modify/remove algorithms used by unchecking the different audio algorithms.
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates up to and including 192kbps
1. G.722.1 (24kbps or 32kbps)
2. G.728 (16kbps)
3. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
4. G.722 (56kbps, 64kbps or 48kbps)*
5. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)**
6. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates above 192kbps
1. AAC-LD (128kbps)***
2. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
3. G.722 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)*
4. G.722.1 (32kbps or 24kbps)
5. G.728 (16kbps)
6. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps, 48kbps)**
7. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
*
G.722 at 64kbps is used in H.323 (IP) calls only.
** G.711 at 64kbps is used in SIP and H.323 (IP) calls only.
*** Dependent on a call rate above the AAC-LD 128 threshold. Note that this is not available on all TANDBERG systems.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.4.3
AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)
Specify a call rate for 128kbps AAC-LD. From this call rate and above, "128kbps AAC-LD" is
available. On lower call rates "64kbps AAC-LD" is available.
Stereo audio requires twice the bandwidth as mono CD-quality audio. Therefore we recommend
to enable stereo audio on high call rates only. To enable stereo CD-quality audio you need to
specify a call rate for when stereo automatically should be enabled. On lower call rates, mono
CD-quality audio "64kbps AAC-LD" will be enabled. Stereo I/O mode needs to be enabled to get
stereo audio, see Stereo Settings for details.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.4.4
Natural Video
Choosing Natural Video will enable 60 fields* per second true interlaced picture for high motion
video. The use of Natural Video requires the H.263+ and H.263++ video protocols. Natural video
will be disabled in H.323 MultiSite calls and in H.320 Continuous Presence MultiSite calls.
Auto
When set to ‘Auto’, the MXP will prefer the H.264 400p/448p resolutions from call
speeds between 384kbps and 1920kbps.
For calls above 1920kbps, iSIF/iCIF video will then be preferred.
However, if Natural Video is forced to a specific call rate (e.g. 768kbps), iCIF/iSIF
will be preferred on all calls that match or exceed that call rate.
When connecting to systems that do not support the new H.264 resolutions,
Natural Video will perform as it did in previous versions.
Off
Natural Video Off will disable both transmission and reception of Natural Video.
Custom 384 kbps and above to 1920 kbps and above.
* 50 fields per second on PAL systems.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.4.5
Max Upstream Rate (kbps)
The Max Upstream Rate (kbps) defines the desired maximum transmitted call rate over H.323
networks. This is to be able to limit the outgoing (transmit) bandwidth whilst keeping the
maximum incoming (receive) bandwidth, especially useful for home offices with different
upstream (transmit) and downstream (receive) rates, typically ADSL.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.4.6
Video Quality
The different video sources need different Video Quality Settings. Main Camera, VCR, AUX and
Split Screen have Motion as default. PC, Document Camera and VNC have Sharpness as
default.
Motion*
Optimized for smooth motion video (CIF/SIF or 288p for low bandwidths,
448p/400p, Interlaced CIF (iCIF) / Interlaced SIF (iSIF) or w448p for high
bandwidths).
Sharpness* Optimized for sharp video (4CIF/4SIF, SVGA, XGA, w720p).
Auto
The system chooses the best of Motion or Sharpness depending on picture
layout and bandwidth.
5.4.6.1 Intelligent Video Management (IVM)
It is possible to configure the picture sent from the system depending upon specific requirements
and applications adding an additional level of flexibility and adaptability.
Generally, the IVM will always try to transmit the format closest to the video input format. Each
video input can be configured to either motion or sharpness:
Motion*:
When there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are
present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
At low bit rate:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
CIF will be used from a PAL video input
SIF from NTSC
w288p from wide format (HD720p) input
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
At high bit rate:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
448p will be used from a PAL video input if Natural Video is ‘Off’ or ‘Auto’ or if
Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit rate is lower than x kbps
400p from NTSC if Natural Video is ‘Off’ or ‘Auto’ or if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and
the bit rate is lower than x kbps
iCIF will be used from a PAL video input, if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit
rate is higher than or equal to x kbps
iSIF from NTSC, if Natural Video is ‘x kbps’ and the bit rate is higher than or equal
to x kbps
ƒ
ƒ
w448p will be used from a wide format (HD720p) input
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Sharpness*:
Improved quality of detailed images and graphics, lower frame rate and ideal for enhancing
quality at lower bandwidths.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
4CIF will be used from a PAL video input, Digital Clarity
4SIF from NTSC, Digital Clarity
w720p will be used from a wide format (HD720p) input
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
IVM Resolution
The following table shows relationship between Transmission modes selected by the system
when Motion or Sharpness is set in the Call Quality menu. IVM will use this table to optimize the
Video quality, according to the capabilities of the remote system(s):
Basic Video
Quality
Video Input
Transmission mode selection rules*
MOTION
MOTION
PAL
448p -> iCIF@50 -> CIF -> QCIF
NTSC
400p -> 448p -> iSIF@60 -> iCIF@60 ->
SIF -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION
VGA
448p -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION
SVGA
XGA
448p -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION
448p -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION
Wide
PAL
w448p -> w288p -> CIF -> QCIF
4CIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF
4SIF -> 4CIF -> VGA -> SIF -> CIF -> QCIF
VGA -> 4CIF -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS
SHARPNESS
SHARPNESS
SHARPNESS
NTSC
VGA
SVGA
SVGA -> XGA -> 4CIF -> VGA -> CIF ->
QCIF
SHARPNESS
SHARPNESS
XGA
Wide
XGA -> SVGA -> 4CIF -> VGA -> CIF ->
QCIF
w720p -> w576p -> w448p -> w288p -> CIF
-> QCIF
Transmission mode with Motion or Sharpness selections.
5.4.6.2 Native Resolutions
The following live video resolutions are supported on the system*:
Native NTSC:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
400p (528 x 400)
iSIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
Native PAL:
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity
ƒ
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
448p (576 x 448)
iCIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels)
Native PC Resolutions:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels), Digital Clarity
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels), Digital Clarity
VGA (640 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
Wide (16:9) Resolutions:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
w288p (512 x 288 pixels)
w448p (768 x 448 pixels)
w576p (1024 x 576 pixels)
w720p (1280 x 720 pixels)
* Note that the TANDBERG 550 MXP and the TANDBERG 1000 MXP do not transmit the following video formats: 448p,
400p, iCIF, iSIF, w288p, w448p, w576p, and w720p.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.4.7
Default Call Settings
Default Call Settings are connected with Call Settings in the call menu. If you leave Call Settings
unchanged when making a call, the system will use the default Call Settings in the call.
In addition to the Call Settings Call Type, Net, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k), you also find settings
for H.320 Auto bandwidth and H.323 Auto bandwidth in Call Settings.
Call type
Call Type can be set to:
ƒ
ƒ
Video Call
Telephone Call
If either the Call Type is set to Telephone Call or the Place Telephone Call
icon is selected when making a call, the call will be set up as a telephone call.
In all other cases the call will be set up as a video call.
Some network configurations may cause the setup of a video call to fail. The
call will then be set up as a telephone call instead if Fallback to Telephony is
enabled.
For MultiSite calls, Call Type enables you to specify both telephone calls and
video calls in the same conference.
Network
The Network alternatives are:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Auto
ISDN
H.323
SIP
If Auto is selected, the system will select the right network depending on the
entered number:
ƒ
ƒ
If an IP-address (e.g. 10.12.34.56 ) is entered, H.323 is selected.
If the first digits in the number match those set in H.323 Prefix, H.323
is selected.
ƒ
In other cases, ISDN (H.320) is selected.
ISDN indicates:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ISDN-BRI
ISDN-PRI
Leased E1/T1
External Networks
If a gatekeeper is present, it is possible to place IP-calls using “telephone-
style” numbers, e.g. an E.164 alias, according to the numbering plan
implemented in the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper will then translates the dialed
number into an IP-address, see H.323 Settings for more information about
gatekeepers.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Select ISDN to ensure that the call is set up as an ISDN call.
Select H.323 to ensure that the call is set up as an H.323 call.
Select SIP to ensure that the call is set up as an SIP call.
Bandwidth
Bandwidth decides the quality of the video picture.
When set to Auto the system will establish a connection using a proper
bandwidth for the call, typically 384kbps for ISDN calls and 768kbps for IP
calls.
When set to Max the system will set up the call with maximum bandwidth
depending on the selected network.
Overview*
Auto:
Max:
384 kbps on ISDN/768 kbps on LAN
768 kbps on ISDN-BRI
1472/1920 kbps (23/30Ch) on ISDN-PRI (T1/E1)
4Mbps(4096 kbps, IP only)
4096 kbps = 4 Mbps, IP only
3072 kbps = 3 Mbps, IP only
2560 kbps = 2,5 Mbps, IP only
1920 kbps = 2 Mbps, 30B
1472 kbps = 23B
1152 kbps = 18B
768 kbps = 12B
512 kbps = 8B
384 kbps = 6B
320 kbps = 5B
256 kbps = 4B
192 kbps = 3B
128 kbps = 2B, Bonding/H.221
64 kbps = 1B, H.221
H0
= 1xH0, 384 kbps, PRI only
* Note that some software versions and networks do not support all channel selections.
Restrict
(56k)
A restricted call uses 56kbps channels rather then the default unrestricted
64kbps channels.
Some older networks (primarily in the USA) do not support 64kbps channels
and require the use of restricted 56kbps calls. By default the system will dial
an unrestricted call and downspeed to 56kbps if necessary.
To force a restricted call, choose Restrict (56k) On.
H.221 or 2x64 (2x56) Calling
Some older or low end video systems do not have the ability to make bonded ISDN calls. In these
cases it is necessary to dial both ISDN numbers separately to call those systems.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
These types of calls are often referred to as
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
H.221 calls
2x64 calls
2x56 calls
- as making 2 x 64 kbps or 2 x 56 kbps calls to the same system.
Place this type of call by:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Set Network to ISDN
Set Bandwidth to 128 kbps
A field for the 2nd number pops up in Call Settings.
Enter the second number in the Call Settings field. For 128 kbps calls that use bonding,
ignore the second number field and just enter one number to be dialed.
Using sub-address / extension address / MCU password
Sub-address is used to address different systems on the same ISDN line and is primarily used in
European Countries. LAN equivalent extension address or TCS-4 is used to address different
systems on a LAN, when dialing via a gateway.
To specify an ISDN sub-address or its LAN equivalent extension address (TCS-4), add a star (*)
after the number and then enter the sub-address/extension address.
Example:
12345678*10 ( <number>*<Sub-address/extension address/MCU password>)
When dialing IP via a gateway, the number behind the star (*) on IP might be interpreted as an
extension address.
When calling to external MCU’s requiring a password (TSC-1), this password can be added after
the star (*). If no password is specified, the user will be asked to enter the password (after
connecting to the MCU).
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.5.1
Inputs
Mic 1- 3 and Audio input 4-6
By default, all inputs are enabled. Just plug in an audio source and it is active. Audio inputs that
are On will automatically be mixed. Unconnected inputs will automatically be muted. Select Off to
prevent audio/noise from connected but unused inputs. The activated audio sources are stored
on camera presets.
Mic 1, 2 and 3 are intended for electrets type microphones. The microphone inputs are balanced
with 24V phantom power.
Audio input 4 is intended for connection to an external microphone amplifier or an external fixed
mixer. It is crucial that the external mixer is a fixed mixer. Automatic, smart and other types of
adaptive mixers might cause the echo canceller to malfunction.
Audio input 5 is intended for connection to external playback devices or to telephone add-on
hybrids. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not be connected to any
microphones. The audio source connected to this input will be heard from the local speaker as
well.
Audio input 6 is intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player. It can also be connected to
other external playback devices. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not
be connected to any microphones. The audio entering this input will be heard from the local
speaker as well. If Auto is selected, the audio from the VCR will only be heard when VCR is
selected as video source.
Mix Mode
Auto
The adjustment of each microphone signal is done automatically to obtain the best
possible audio and minimize the background noise.
Fixed
Fixed will maintain a constant weighting of all microphones.
VCR Ducking
If VCR Ducking is activated, the VCR audio level will be attenuated if someone talks into the
microphone or at the far end.
The VCR ducking is only valid for audio input 6. If input 5 and 6 is configured to one stereo input
pair, see Stereo Settings, then the VCR ducking will apply to both input 5 and 6.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Level Settings
It is possible to adjust the audio input levels according to which external audio equipment is
connected. The on-screen audio level indicator will make it easier to set the correct input level
settings. The input level should be adjusted so that the average level reaches the transition
between the green and the yellow area. The audio inputs are adjustable in steps of 1.5 dB from 0
dB to 22.5 dB.
To help adjusting the input levels there is also a Peak Performance meter showing the peak
audio volume for each of the audio inputs. The level should be adjusted so that the Peak
Performance meter never reaches the maximum value to avoid the acoustic echo canceller to
malfunction due to overload of the microphone.
The default levels for Mic 1,2 and 3 are set for use with an Audio Technica AT871R or AT841R
microphone in an average videoconferencing room. The gain can be adjusted correctly for a wide
range of microphones.
A few examples of microphone levels are:
Audio Technica AT871R
Audio Technica AT841R
+3dB (default)
+3dB
TANDBERG Audio Science:
Audio Technica AT-861PZ +3dB
Crown PZM-6D
+19.5dB
Audio inputs 4, 5 and 6 are set to a default level which is adhered to by most manufacturers
of audio-visual equipment and is a level at which most audio-visual equipment (CD-players,
VCRs or DVDs) will work.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
TANDBERG Audio Science microphone elements: Audio Technica AT-861PZ and Crown PZM-
6D
Signal levels -
microphone
inputs
Clipping level
Nominal level
Input menu level
settings
Vpp
dBu
dBu
0.0 dB
1.5 dB
83.0 mVpp
69.8 mVpp
58.8 mVpp
49.4 mVpp
41.6 mVpp
35.0 mVpp
29.4 mVpp
24.8 mVpp
20.8 mVpp
17.5 mVpp
14.8 mVpp
12.4 mVpp
10.4 mVpp
8.8 mVpp
-28.4 dBu
-29.9 dBu
-31.4 dBu
-32.9 dBu
-34.4 dBu
-35.9 dBu
-37.4 dBu
-38.9 dBu
-40.4 dBu
-41.9 dBu
-43.4 dBu
-44.9 dBu
-46.4 dBu
-47.9 dBu
-49.4 dBu
-50.9 dBu
-46.4 dBu
-47.9 dBu
-49.4 dBu
-50.9 dBu
-52.4 dBu
-53.9 dBu
-55.4 dBu
-56.9 dBu
-58.4 dBu
-59.9 dBu
-61.4 dBu
-62.9 dBu
-64.4 dBu
-65.9 dBu
-67.4 dBu
-68.9 dBu
3.0 dB
4.5 dB
6.0 dB
7.5 dB
9.0 dB
10.5 dB
12.0 dB
13.5 dB
15.0 dB
16.5 dB
18.0 dB
19.5 dB
21.0 dB
22.5 dB
7.4 mVpp
6.2 mVpp
Table1: Signal Levels - Microphone inputs
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Signal levels -
line level inputs
Clipping level
Vpp
Nominal level
dBu
Input menu level
settings
dBu
0.0 dB
1.5 dB
15.5 Vpp
13.0 Vpp
11.0 Vpp
9.2 Vpp
7.8 Vpp
6.5 Vpp
5.5 Vpp
4.6 Vpp
3.9 Vpp
3.3 Vpp
2.8 Vpp
2.3 Vpp
2.0 Vpp
1.6 Vpp
1.4 Vpp
1.2 Vpp
17.0 dBu
15.5 dBu
14.0 dBu
12.5 dBu
11.0 dBu
9.5 dBu
8.0 dBu
6.5 dBu
5.0 dBu
3.5 dBu
2.0 dBu
0.5 dBu
-1.0 dBu
-2.5 dBu
-4.0 dBu
-5.5 dBu
-1.0 dBu
-2.5 dBu
3.0 dB
-4.0 dBu
4.5 dB
-5.5 dBu
6.0 dB
-7.0 dBu
7.5 dB
-8.5 dBu
9.0 dB
-10.0 dBu
-11.5 dBu
-13.0 dBu
-14.5 dBu
-16.0 dBu
-17.5 dBu
-19.0 dBu
-20.5 dBu
-22.0 dBu
-23.5 dBu
10.5 dB
12.0 dB
13.5 dB
15.0 dB
16.5 dB
18.0 dB
19.5 dB
21.0 dB
22.5 dB
Table2: Signal Levels - Line level inputs
Note that for the dBu value for input clipping level and absolute max output level, a sine waveform
is assumed. If numbers in dBV are required, dBV value is 2.2 dB lower than the dBu value, e.q. -
10 dBu equals -12.2 dBV
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.5.2
Outputs
Audio out 1 - 3
Audio out 1 is intended for connection to TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module, televisions or
audio amplifiers.
Audio out 2 is intended for connection to audio recording equipment or to a telephone add-on
hybrid. The signal is a mix of audio from both the far end and local end (not from Audio in 5).
Audio out 3 is intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment. The signal is a mix
of audio from far end and local end (not from Audio in 6).
Note that audio out 2 or audio out 3 never should be connected to a loudspeaker placed in the
same room as the microphones connected to the system. This will cause “howling” and possible
damage to the speaker system. If an output is Off, no audio will be sent to that output.
Out 1 Mode
If Out 1 Mode is set to Auto, the system will select analog or digital (SPDIF) mode dependent on
the detected Audio Module. If a TANDBERG Digital NAM is detected, SPDIF mode will be
selected, otherwise analog mode will be selected.
Setting the Out 1 Mode to either Analog or SPDIF will override the auto-detected mode.
See Stereo Settings for more information.
Audio Module
Select Audio Module according to the type of Audio Module installed if this is not automatically
detected. The Audio Module setting is only available if the audio module of the system is
unidentified.
Level Settings
Adjust the audio output levels according to the parameters of the external audio equipment
connected. These levels should only be adjusted when installing new audio equipment. The
default settings are correct for the TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio module and for most
consumer electronics devices (televisions, VCRs, etc.). The volume keys on the remote control
adjust the level of output 1 (the speaker output). The volume control has no effect on other
outputs.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Signal levels -
line level
outputs*
Absolute max. output level
Vpp
Nominal level
Output menu
level settings
dBu
dBu
0.0 dB
1.2 Vpp
1.4 Vpp
1.6 Vpp
1.9 Vpp
2.3 Vpp
2.8 Vpp
3.3 Vpp
3.9 Vpp
4.6 Vpp
5.5 Vpp
6.5 Vpp
7.8 Vpp
9.2 Vpp
11.0 Vpp
13.0 Vpp
15.5 Vpp
-5.5 dBu
-4.0 dBu
-2.5 dBu
-1.0 dBu
0.5 dBu
2.0 dBu
3.5 dBu
5.0 dBu
6.5 dBu
8.0 dBu
9.5 dBu
11.0 dBu
12.5 dBu
14.0 dBu
15.5 dBu
17.0 dBu
-23.5 dBu
-22.0 dBu
-20.5 dBu
-19.0 dBu
-17.5 dBu
-16.0 dBu
-14.5 dBu
-13.0 dBu
-11.5 dBu
-10.0 dBu
-8.5 dBu
-7.0 dBu
-5.5 dBu
-4.0 dBu
-2.5 dBu
-1.0 dBu
1.5 dB
3.0 dB
4.5 dB
6.0 dB
7.5 dB
9.0 dB
10.5 dB
12.0 dB
13.5 dB
15.0 dB
16.5 dB
18.0 dB
19.5 dB
21.0 dB
22.5 dB
* Applies to Output 1 at volume setting 15.
Note that for the dBu value for input clipping level and absolute max output level, a sine waveform
is assumed. If numbers in dBV are required, dBV value is 2.2 dB lower than the dBu value, e.q. -
10 dBu equals -12.2 dBV
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.5.3
Echo Control
Mic 1-3 and Audio 4
Each of the 3 microphone inputs and Audio input 4 has a separate acoustic echo canceller. One
echo canceller per input provides more sophisticated control than having one common canceller
for all microphones.
In addition to echo cancellation, the system has built-in noise reduction (NR). NR reduces
constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc.). In
addition, a high pass filter (Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise.
On
Echo control is normally set to On to prevent the far end from hearing their own
audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times. The echo canceller
continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in
the audio conditions are very significant the echo canceller may take a second or
two to re-adjust.
Off
You can choose to switch off the echo canceller for the available audio sources.
Echo Control should be switched Off if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
On+NR
Activates both Echo Control and Noise Reduction.
Note that it is your echo canceller that improves the audio quality experienced by the other
site. When you hear an echo of your own audio it is most likely the far end’s echo canceller
that is malfunctioning.
Tips for improving the echo canceller performance:
ƒ
Place all microphones as far as possible from the loudspeakers. Minimum loudspeaker-
microphone distance should be 2 meters (6.5 ft).
ƒ
It is recommended to place the microphones between 1 and 2 meters away from the
persons speaking. By using several microphones, the ratio distance loudspeaker-to-
mic/mic-to-speaker can be increased. Increasing this ratio improves the echo canceller
performance.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Place the microphones as far as possible from noise sources.
Reduce the volume setting. Ensure that the loudspeakers do not distort the audio.
The echo canceller tries to estimate the echo path from the speaker system to the
microphones. Moving objects change this path; therefore try to avoid moving objects. Be
especially aware of large objects and objects placed close to either the microphone or the
speaker system as these objects will cause severe changes to the echo path.
Avoid putting paper sheets etc. on the microphone.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Avoid moving the microphone or loudspeaker.
In the presence of low frequency noise, enable the noise reduction (NR).
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.5.4
Stereo Settings
Settings
Output response
Out 1
Mode*
Stereo I/O
Mode
Stereo
Speakers
Audio out 1
Audio out 2
Audio out
3
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
SPDIF
SPDIF
SPDIF
SPDIF
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Loudspeaker
mono
AUX
VCR
Loudspeaker
left
Loudspeaker
right
VCR
Loudspeaker
mono
VCR-left
VCR-right
VCR
Loudspeaker
left
Loudspeaker
right
Loudspeaker
mono
AUX
VCR
Loudspeaker
L+R**
AUX
VCR
Loudspeaker
mono
VCR-left
VCR-left
VCR-right
VCR-right
Loudspeaker
L+R**
*Out 1 Mode: Auto/Analog/SPDIF is described in Outputs.
**L+R = Left + Right
When Stereo I/O Mode is Off and Stereo Speakers is Off, the output response will be a mono
loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1, AUX on Audio out 2 and VCR on Audio out 3 regardless on
the Out 1 Mode setting.
In analog mode the Stereo Speaker On will provide a stereo loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1
and 2.
If Stereo I/O Mode is On, audio input 5 and 6 and audio output 2 and 3 will behave as a stereo
input/output pair, VCR-left and right. The VCR Ducking and AGC setting for audio input 6 will in
this case apply to both audio input 5 and 6. The Audio out 2 (VCR-left stereo channel) will be a
mix of the microphones and the far end left channel. Audio out 3 (VCR-right stereo channel) will
be a mix of the microphones and the far end right channel. (Note that stereo speakers set to on in
analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for details).
If Stereo I/O Mode is Off, Audio out 2 will be a mix of audio input 6, microphones and the far end
(the received far end signal is either mono, or stereo that is summed left+right into mono in near
end codec). Audio out 3 will be a mix of audio input 5, microphones and the far end. (Note that
stereo speakers set to on in analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for
details).
Note that in SPDIF mode, you are able to receive stereo through Audio out 1 independent of the
Stereo I/O mode setting.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Note that if Stereo Speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
If the system is connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeakers shall be
present if a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and VCR-Right or a stereo
signal is received from the Far End.
If the system is not connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeaker outputs
will be present in the following situations:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If system is idle and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and
VCR-Right.
If system is in a call with mic off and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs
VCR-Left and VCR-Right, or a stereo signal is received from the Far End.
Otherwise the Loudspeaker Left signal will be equal to Loudspeaker Right.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.5.5
Audio Leveling (AGC)
On
Select On to allow automatic adjustments (Automatic Gain Control) of audio levels.
When On, the AGC maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will
not be amplified.
Off
Audio leveling is not activated.
Note that to ensure correct behavior of the AGC, it is crucial that the levels on the input
connectors are adjusted correctly using the audio input level settings. The AGC will not
compensate for severe maladjustment of input levels.
When applying a weak signal in the presence of strong background noise, the AGC might amplify
the background noise as well as the signal. Therefore, in noisy environments, it is advisable to
turn the AGC off.
Example:
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels, and be at different
distances from the microphones. As a result, some of the participants would be harder to hear
than others. The AGC corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels
when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when
“louder” people speak.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.5.6
Alert Tones and Volume
Video Call Alert Tone and Telephone Alert Tone
To help distinguish between incoming video calls and ordinary telephone calls, it is recommended
to use different ringing tones for video calls and telephone calls.
Alert Volume
You may change the volume level for the selected ringing tone.
Alert Speaker
The system also has an internal, call-alerting speaker.
On
Off
The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor may
not be switched on.
The internal speaker is switched off.
Key Tones
On
Off
There will be a sound indicator when pressing keys on the remote control.
There will be no sound when pressing keys on the remote control.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.5.7
Graphical View
Graphical View
The graphical view is a visual presentation of the audio inputs and audio outputs.
•
•
The Inputs + Far End In are listed on the left, showing the name of the input sources.
The outputs + Far End Out are listed on the bottom, showing the name of the output
sources.
•
The green dots show the active connections between inputs and outputs.
Press the buttons for the input sources and the output sources to show the active audio streams.
Test tone: Select an input/output source and press OK to play a test tone.
The active audio streams on Far End Out
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.6.1
Camera Tracking Mode
Slow
The system waits a while before zooming in on a single person speaking.
Suitable when wide-angle images are preferred over close-up images.
Normal
Fast
Should be used in regular meetings.
The system quickly zooms in on a single person speaking. Suitable when close-
ups are preferred over wide-angle images.
Note that the Camera Tracking Mode entry will not be available if not using the TANDBERG
WAVE II Camera.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.6.2
MCU Status Line
On
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed and provide information
about the conference.
Off
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will not be displayed.
Auto
The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed for a few seconds and
then timed out. When grabbing the remote control, the indicators will be shown
again.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.6.3
Floor to Full Screen
When "Floor to Full Screen" is enabled, someone who requests floor will be seen by all
participants as full screen. When "Floor to Full Screen" is "Off", someone who request floor in a
MultiSite conference using the 5+1 layout will be seen in the large square, rather than full screen.
On
Off
The participant that has the floor is displayed in full screen regardless of what
MultiSite layout that is used.
The participant that hasthe floor is displayed in the MultiSite layout that is used.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.6.4
Web Snapshots
The system is able to generate JPEG snapshots and provide them when requested (as ‘http get’
or via ftp). See Appendix 6 for descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
On
Off
Snapshots generation is enabled.
Snapshots generation is disabled.
Note that web snapshots are not generated if the conference is encrypted.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.6.5
MultiSite Picture Mode
MultiSite* Picture Mode determines the default layout of a MultiSite call. Available layouts are:
Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split, and Voice Switched. You can change the layout during a call using
the layout option in MultiSite Services.
Auto Split
Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. A MultiSite
call with 3 or 4 video participants is displayed with 4 Split. A MultiSite call with
5 or 6 video participants is displayed with 5+1 Split.
Voice
Switched
Voice Switched mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen.
4 Split displays the 4 last speaking Participants.
4 Split
5+1 Split
5+1 Split displays the speaking participant in a big picture and the other
participants in small pictures.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Advanced Continuous Presence Layout (5+1) - In this mode the Intelligent Call Management will use 4*CIF resolution for
better clarity and H.263 video compression
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Voice Switched mode
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.6.6
Video Name
As a default, the video inputs are given the names Main Cam, PC, Doc Cam, VCR, AUX or VNC,
dependent on what video sources are available on your system. The video names cannot exceed
eight characters. The names correspond to the video names in the Presentation Menu (Choose
Presentation from the Menu and open the Main Video or Presentation Video pop up menu). If
video names are changed, you will see the changed name appear in the Main Video and
Presentation Video menus.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.7.1
Encryption
(Country specific)
Auto
The system will try to set up calls using encryption.
Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES or DES), the call
will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
MultiSite calls*: In order to have encrypted MultiSite calls, all sites must support
encryption. The padlock symbol will indicate encryption mode (AES or DES). If there
is a mix of AES and DES encryption, only the symbol for DES encryption (single
padlock) will be displayed. The 'closed padlock' will only be displayed on each site
when all links in the MultiSite conference are encrypted.
If the far end supports encryption, the systems will initiate encryption after the call is
connected (an ‘open padlock’ symbol will be displayed). When encryption has been
established, a ‘closed padlock’ symbol will be displayed.
On
Off
The system will only send and receive encrypted data. The call will not be
established if not all participants support encryption.
The system will not send or receive encrypted data.
Technical encryption information like encryption algorithm and encryption check code can be
found in the Call Status menu.
* Only available on systems with MultiSite option supported and installed.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.7.2
Encryption Mode
Auto
The system will try to use the most secure encryption - AES, dependent on the
capabilities of the other sites. For sites that do not support AES encryption, DES
encryption will be tried.
AES
DES
The system will try to use AES with 128 bits encryption when setting up calls. If AES
is not supported by the other site(s), no other type of encryption will be initiated.
The system will always try to set up the call using DES with 56 bits encryption on
ISDN and IP. If all other sites do not support DES, no other type of encryption will be
initiated.
Both AES and DES Encryption are supported for mixed ISDN/IP calls. In addition AES -and DES
Encrypted sites can be connected at the same time.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.7.3
Passwords
Administrator Password, IP Access Password, Streaming Password, VNC Password, Access
Code and Remote Software Upgrade password are duplicated from their respective menus.
Using the Security menu gives you a quick way to change all passwords of the system.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.7.4
Camera Standby Mode
There is a setting to the Security menu called Camera Standby mode On (default)/Off. When
Camera Standby mode is On, the camera turns away when standby is activated. When the
system is activated the camera turns back to normal position.
On
The camera will turn away when standby mode is activated and turn back to normal
position when the system is active again.
This makes it easy to do a visual check to see if the camera is active or not.
Off
The camera will always stay in normal position and will not turn away when standby
mode is active.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.1
ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1
Network
Type
Before using the system it is necessary to specify which network to use and
define its settings.
ISDN-
BRI
If you want to use your system via ISDN-BRI, you should select Network Type:
ISDN-BRI and enter the ISDN BRI Settings menu to set the BRI parameters.
ISDN-
PRI*
If you want to use your system via ISDN-PRI, you should select Network Type:
ISDN-PRI and enter the ISDN PRI Settings menu to set the PRI parameters.
Leased
E1/T1*
If you want to use your system via Leased E1/T1, you should select Network
Type: Leased E1/T1 and enter the Leased E1/T1 Settings (see Leased E1/T1
Settings) menu to set the Leased E1/T1 parameters.
External
If you want to use special networks and connect using RS449, V.35, X.21 or
connect to ISDN via an external IMUX, you should select Network Type: External
and enter the External Network Settings (see External Network Settings menu to
set the External Network parameters.
*Note that both Leased E1/T1 and ISDN-PRI uses the same interface on the codec marked
E1/T1.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.1.1 ISDN-BRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-BRI, make the following settings:
1. Set ISDN switch type
2. Enter ISDN line numbers (+ SPIDs if required)
3. Disable unused lines
Some software versions do not support 6 ISDN lines, therefore some of the Line Setup entries
may be grayed out.
ISDN BRI switch type
Select the type of ISDN network connected to your unit. Note that 1TR6 should only be used if
you are operating the system behind a PABX.
Line setup
This menu allows you to program the numbers associated with your ISDN line. If you want to use
this ISDN line, you need to set Enabled On and enter the numbers of your ISDN line. If some of
the ISDN lines are not to be used, set Enabled Off. Line 1 should always be enabled. National
ISDN and AT&T Custom ISDN might require SPID numbers associated with your ISDN numbers.
If you have received two different SPID (Service Profile IDentifier) numbers for each ISDN line
from your network provider, you must program both of them.
Example:
Numbers
SPIDS
ISDN BRI 1:
ISDN BRI 2:
ISDN BRI 3:
ISDN BRI 4:
ISDN BRI 5:
ISDN BRI 6:
67838498
67838498
016783849800
016783849810
23478060
23478070
012347806000
012347807000
23478420
23478430
012347842000
012347843000
23478520
23478530
012347852000
012347853000
23478540
23478550
012347854000
012347855000
23478560
23478570
012347856000
012347857000
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Advanced ISDN Settings
Sub address
Using a sub address enables you to connect up to eight ISDN terminals to the same ISDN
telephone number and line. The terminals are addressed by using different sub addresses. To
call a terminal with a sub address, separate the ISDN telephone number and the sub address
with a ‘*’. Note that this service is dependent on your service provider and has limited access on
some ISDN networks.
Example: 12345678*2 (up to four digit sub addresses are possible).
Validate Numbers / MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)
The use of MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) enables you to attach different ISDN terminals,
with different numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. If Validate Numbers is set to
"On" only calls to those numbers specified in the Line Setup menus will be answered. If available
this service can be ordered from your telephone company.
Parallel dial
On
Off
Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a BONDING call.
Channels will be dialed one by one, which may increase the dialing time.
Send Own Numbers
On
Off
The system will send its own numbers to the far end.
The system will not send its own numbers to the far end, but please note that the
network may still send your numbers to the far end.
Sending Complete
On
Off
The system will send the ISDN message information element Sending Complete.
The system will not send Sending Complete. Default is “Off”
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.1.2 ISDN-PRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-PRI, configure the following
settings:
1. Set PRI switch type
2. Enter PRI line number
Note that the T1 format is predefined to ESF and the line code is B8ZS. This is not configurable.
Number Range
Enter the range of numbers for your PRI line. If this number is programmed and MSN: On (see
Validate numbers in Advanced ISDN Settings) only calls to this number will be answered.
ISDN PRI Switch Type
Select the type of PRI switch to which your system is connected.
Below is a list of common ISDN-PRI/T1 switches.
Manufacturer
PRI Switch Type setting
Type
ATT 4 ESS
ATT 5 ESS
DMS 100
DMS 250
AT&T
AT&T ISDN
AT&T ISDN or National ISDN*
National ISDN
AT&T/Lucent
Northern
Telecom
Telecom
Northern
National ISDN
* Settings will depend on configuration of the switch. PRI Switch Type is not changed when
Restoring Defaults.
Channel Hunting
Max Channels
Maximum number of channels the system may use at any given time.
Low
Channel
The lowest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
selecting channels for outgoing calls.
High Channel
Search
The highest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
selecting channels for outgoing calls.
Specifies where the system will start searching for available B-channels
for outgoing calls.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Example:
Max Channels may be used for PRIs that are provisioned for a lower number of channels.
High Channel, Low Channel and Search may be used for PRIs provisioned with specific
requirements for B-channel usage.
In the example above, the system will start searching for available B-channels at channel 20,
since Search is set to High and High Channel is set to 20. The system will not search for
channels below 10, since Low Channel is set to 10. Furthermore if the user tries to make an 8
channel call, the call will be established with 6 channels, since Max Channels is set to 6.
Line Settings
T1 Cable
Length 1
T1 Cable Length 1 specifies the distance to the CSU connected to the
E1/T1 port 1 on codec 1.
E1-CRC-4 is used for most E1-PRI configurations. You can turn it off if not
supported by your E1 network equipment.
E1-CRC-4
For further information see Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Advanced ISDN-PRI Settings
NSF is a non standard facility. Your network provider may require a service selection in your
ISDN configuration. Enter the Service code here. Valid NSF service codes are from 1 to 31. Enter
0 to disable NSF service codes.
Example:
AT&T offers several digital switched services. These include SDN with service code 1 and
ACCUNET with service code 6.
Below is a list of common service profiles. As these profiles may change, contact your service
provider to get the correct profile.
Service profiles for AT&T:
NSF Service
Disable: 0
SDN (including GSDN): 1
Megacom 800: 2
Megacom: 3
Service profiles for Sprint:
NSF Service
Reserved: 0
Private: 1
Inwatts: 2
Outwatts:3
Accunet: 6
FX: 4
Long Distance: 7
International 800: 8
MultiQuest: 16
TieTrunk: 5
Service profiles for MCI:
NSF Service
Call Redirection Service: 23
VNET/Vision: 1
800: 2
PRISM1, PRISMII, WATS: 3
900: 4
DAL: 5
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.1.3 Leased E1/T1 Settings
Call Control
Auto
When Auto is selected, the system will automatically initiate a connection as
soon as it detects that the far end tries to make a call. This mode is also
commonly known as "data triggered" mode, because the existence of certain
data patterns on the line triggers a connection.
Manual
When manual is selected, the user has to explicitly issue a dial command to
make the system connect to the far end system. Receiving an incoming call is
not possible.
Network Interface
Indicates if the network is of type E1 (30 channels) or T1 (24 channels). E1 will be default for PAL
versions, T1 default for NTSC versions.
Max Channels
Indicates the maximum number of channels the codec is allowed to use on the E1/T1 interface.
When E1 is selected, maximum is 30 channels. When T1 is selected, maximum is 24 channels.
Start Channel
Indicates the first E1/T1 channel the codec is allowed to use. This setting might be used if the
E1/T1 line is shared with other equipment.
T1 Line Coding
Indicates how the signals on the line should be coded. If parts of the line between the systems
use restricted coding, this should be selected.
Note that all settings must be identical on both sides of the Leased E1/T1 connection.
Line Settings
This is the same menu as for ISDN-PRI. Please refer to ISDN-PRI Settings.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.1.4 External Network Settings
Before using the system together with external network equipment, you must specify the network
parameters on this page. The system has support for up to 2 Mbps (depending on the Bandwidth
key loaded) using the External Network (RS449/V.35/X.21) interface. Note that the physical
interface on External Networks is one non-standard 26 pin connector. Special cables are
required, see Interfaces for cable pinouts.
Call Control
RS366
Dialing
RS366 Dialing is the only dialing protocol supported and would normally be
used together with network clocking RS449/V.35 Compatible when the external
equipment uses RS366 ports.
RS366
Adtran
ISU 512
RS366 Adtran ISU 512 offers extra usability when dialing RS366 via an
ADTRAN ISU 512 IMUX. This dialing scheme will map the call type and
bandwidth selection to ADTRAN ISU 512 specific suffixes to the dialed number.
Should only be used when connected to an ADTRAN ISU 512.
The Adtran ISU512 uses the following suffixes <Number>#C#R
#C = Call Type
#2 = audio
#3 = 56kbps
#4 = 64kbps
#R = Channel Rate
#0 = 2xh221 (2x56\64kbps)
#1 to 8 = the Call Rate.
Leased
Line
Leased Line is a non-dialing protocol and should be used when two codecs are
connected in a point-to-point connection. Use Leased Line when the
handshaking signals DTR and CD are available. DTR and CD correspond to
the X.21 network’s C and I signals.
Data
Triggered
Data Triggered mode uses TxData (transmit data), RxData (receive data) and
clock signals only. Use Data Triggered when no handshake signals are
available.
Manual
Manual should be used when no handshake signals are available and the
external equipment requires a constantly connected line.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Network clocking
The network clock setting specifies the number of physical external clock signals.
RS449/V35
Compatible
Use RS449/V35 Compatible when the external equipment provides two
clock signals, one for transmit and one for receive. The difference
between RS449 and V35 is only the cable.
X21
Compatible
Use X21 Compatible when the external equipment provides a common
clock signal for both transmit and receive.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.1.5 H.331 Settings
On
Off
Used when broadcasting a videoconference from one site to many others, e.g. via
satellite, where there is no possibility to negotiate quality between the receivers and
the originator due to one-way communication.
Standard two-way communication with quality negotiation between both sides.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.2.1 IP Settings
Remember to restart the system after making changes to IP Settings. This can be done by
selecting the “Save and Restart” at the bottom of the IP setting menu. Changes in IP Settings
menu will not have any effect until the system is restarted.
IP Protocol
IPv4
IPv6
Both
IP version 4 supported.
IP version 6 supported. IP Address, IP Subnet Mask and Gateway will be disabled.
Both IP version 4 and IP version 6 supported.
IP-assignment
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be selected when a DHCP server is present.
Note that for IPv6, DHCP is used for NTP / DNS Server Addresses.
DHCP IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are not used because the DHCP server
assigns these parameters.
Static
The system’s IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be specified in the IP-
address field.
IP-address
IP-address defines the network address of the codec. This address is only used in static mode. In
DHCP-mode, the assigned IP-address can be found on the Welcome Menu.
IP-subnet mask
IP-subnet mask defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode. Your LAN-
administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Gateway
When using DHCP, the default gateway will be set automatically. If the LAN utilizes static IP
addresses, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be specified by the LAN
administrator.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Ethernet Speed
Auto
The codec will auto-detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.
10/Half
10/Full
100/Half
100/Full
The codec will connect to the LAN using 10Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
10 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
100 Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
100 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
IP Access Password
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. The default IP Access Password is “TANDBERG”.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
DNS Settings
DNS Server 1-5
DNS Server defines the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to 5 addresses may be
specified. If the network addresses are unknown, please contact your administrator or Internet
Service Provider.
DNS Domain Name
DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.
Example:
DNS Domain Name is “example.com”, and the name to lookup is “videosystem” will result in a
“videosystem.example.com” DNS lookup.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.2.2 H.323 Settings
E.164 alias
This is the E.164 address of the system. The E.164 address is equivalent to a telephone number,
sometimes combined with access codes. Valid characters are 0-9,* and #. When using a
gatekeeper, the system will send a message to the gatekeeper containing both the E.164 address
and the H.323 ID of the system.
H.323 ID
The H.323 ID of the system may be specified here. The System name is used if no H.323 ID is
entered.
H.323 Call Setup
Direct
An IP-address must be dialed in order to make a H.323 call. The system will
not use a gatekeeper or CallManager
Gatekeeper
The system will use a gatekeeper to make an H.323 call.
CallManager The system will use a CallManager to make a H.323 call.
H.323 Prefix
When dialing a number prefixed with digits specified by H.323 Prefix, and with Net: Auto, an
H.323 call will be placed.
Example:
H.323 Prefix is "555". Dialing "55582" with "Net:Auto" will select LAN.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Gatekeeper Settings
Gatekeeper Discovery
Auto
The system will automatically try to register to any available gatekeeper. If a
gatekeeper responds to the request sent from the codec within 30 seconds this
specific gatekeeper will be used. This requires auto discovery on the gatekeeper
as well. If no gatekeeper responds, the system will not use a gatekeeper for
making H.323 calls and hence an IP-address must be specified manually.
Manual The system will use a specific gatekeeper identified by Gatekeeper IP-address.
Gatekeeper IP Address
This is the gatekeeper IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: Gatekeeper and
Gatekeeper Discovery: Manual.
Note that if your system is part of a TANDBERG Expressway™ firewall traversal solution and
is placed outside the firewall, you should register the IP address of your Border Controller as
the Gatekeeper IP address and set H.323 Call Setup to Gatekeeper.
Authentication Mode
Auto
If Authentication Mode is set to Auto and the gatekeeper indicates that it requires
authentication, the endpoint will automatically try to authenticate itself to the
Gatekeeper.
Off
If Authentication Mode is set to Off the system will not try to authenticate itself to a
Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.
Authentication ID / Authentication Password
The system sends the Authentication ID and Password to a Gatekeeper for authentication. The
authentication is a one way authentication from the endpoint system to a Gatekeeper, i.e. the
endpoint is authenticated to the Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is
required, the endpoint will still try to register.
Multiple H323 Aliases
On
If set to On, the system will register multiple H.323-IDs on the Gatekeeper based on
the values of the parameters: System Name, International Name and H.323 ID.
Up to 3 aliases are possible.
Off
If all fields are empty, the System Name is set to TANDBERG-<serial no> and
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Multiple H.323 Aliases is set to Off.
If set to Off, the system will register a single H.323-IDs on the Gatekeeper based on
the following priority:
• H.323 ID
• International Name
• System Name
The default setting for Multiple H.323 Aliases is Off.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
CallManager Settings
CallManager IP
This is the CallManager IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: CallManager.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Advanced H.323 Settings
The Advanced H.323 Settings only have an effect if they are supported by your IP infrastructure.
NAT
NAT, Network Address Translation, is used when a PC and a videoconferencing system are
connected to a router with NAT support. NAT support in the videoconferencing system enables
proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external videoconferencing system
(when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). When NAT is On, the NAT Server Address will
be shown in the startup-menu: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1".
On
The system will signal the configured "NAT Address" in place of its own IP-address
within Q.931 and H.245.
Auto
The system will try to determine if the "NAT Address" or the real IP-address should
be used within signaling. This is done to make it possible to place calls to endpoints
on the LAN as well as endpoints on the WAN.
NAT Address
This must be the external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. In the router, the following ports must be routed to the
system’s IP-address:
Port 1720
Port 5555-
5560
Port 2326-
2365
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
RSVP
Auto
Off
Resource Reservation Protocol enables the systems to request the optimal amount
of bandwidth for the duration of an IP videoconference.
Resource Reservation Protocol is switched off.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
H.323 Ports
Static
When selecting static H.323 ports for TCP connections the ports 5555 to 5574
will be used for Q.931 and H.245 respectively.
Dynamic
The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls
as some firewall consider this as a sign of attack.
When selecting Dynamic, the H.323 ports used are from 11000 to 65535. Once
65535 is reached they restart again at 11000.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.2.3 SIP Settings
Mode
On
Off
Setting the SIP mode to on will enable the system for incoming and outgoing SIP
calls.
Setting the SIP mode to off will disable incoming and outgoing SIP calls from the
system.
Display Name
The Display name part of the SIP Address (URI) is usually a full name or system name.
Examples:
“Alice Wonderland”
“System 01”
SIP Address
The SIP Address is the SIP URI used to address the system.
SIP Address (URI): <text field>
Examples:
“alice@example.com”
“1234”
“1234@example.com”
Server Discovery
Auto
When Auto is selected, the SIP Server address is obtained using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Manual When Manual is selected, the manually configured SIP Server address will be
used.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
Server Address
The Server Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy and registrar. It is
possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP
and UDP, but another one can be provided.
Server Address: <text field>
Examples:
“sipserver.example.com”
“sipserver.example.com:5060”
“10.0.0.2”
“10.0.0.2:5061”
Authentication
User Name
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
User name: <text field>
Password
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
Password: <text field>
Server Type
Available servers are: Auto, Nortel, Microsoft and Experimental
Current RFC’s and Drafts supported:
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
RFC 3581 An Extension to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for Symmetric Response
Routing
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 2327 SDP: Session Description Protocol
RFC 3264 An Offer/Answer Model with the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
RFC 3263: Session Initiation Protocol (SIP): Locating SIP Servers - No support for
NAPTR records.
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3311 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) UPDATE Method
RFC 2976 SIP INFO Method
ƒ
Draft-levin-mmusic-xml-media-control-03.txt - Used for video fast picture update
requests
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3361 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP-for-IPv4) Option for Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) Servers
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
ƒ
RFC 2032 RTP Payload Format for H.261 Video Streams
ƒ
Draft-ietf-avt-rfc2032-bis-06.txt - Draft for advanced video signaling including
resolution and mpi.
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 2190 RTP Payload Format for H.263 Video Streams
RFC 2429 RTP Payload Format for the 1998 Version of ITU-T Rec. H.263 Video
(H.263+)
ƒ
Draft-ietf-avt-rfc2429-bis-05.txt - Draft for advanced video signaling including
resolution, mpi, annexes and custom formats.
ƒ
ƒ
RFC 3047 RTP Payload Format for ITU-T Recommendation G.722.1
RFC3581 An Extension to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for Symmetric Response
Routing
ƒ
ƒ
RFC3984 RTP Payload Format for H.264 Video
RFC3016 RTP Payload Format for MPEG-4 Audio/Visual Streams
Media Capabilities supported in SIP:
Audio:
PCMU (G.711 u-law)
PCMA (G.711 a-law)
G.722 64 kbps
G722.1 24kbit
G.722.1 32 kbps
AAC-LD 64 kbps
AAC-LD 128 kbps
Video:
H.261: QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30
H.263: SQCIF 1/30, QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, 4CIF 2/30
H.263++: XGA 4/30, SVGA 3/30, VGA 2/30, SQCIF 1/30, QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, 4CIF 2/30
H.264: QCIF 1/30, CIF 1/30, WCIF (w288p) 1/30, W4CIF (w576p) 1/30, 4CIF 1/30, SIF 1/30,
HD1280x720 (w720p) 1/30
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.2.4 SNMP Settings
SNMP Settings
SNMP Trap Host identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager. SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol, SNMP Ver 1) is used for monitoring and configuring of different entities in
a network. The system's SNMP Agent responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
program etc.). SNMP traps are generated by the agent to inform the manager about important
events.
Traps can be sent to multiple SNMP Trap Hosts. Enter the IP address of up to three SNMP
managers. All traps will then be sent to the hosts listed.
SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a
‘password’ in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in the codec. Note that the
SNMP Community name is case sensitive. The default password is "public".
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.2.5 IP Services
NTP IP
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.
This is a requirement for proper operation if H.235 authentication is implemented.
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the time of the system to a reference
time server. The NTP IP setting holds the IP address to a time source where the system can get
the exact time. The time server will subsequently be queried every 24th hour for time updates.
The system will use the time to timestamp messages transmitted to Gatekeepers or Border
Controllers requiring H.235 authentication.
HTTPS Protocol
HTTPS can be enabled and disabled from the used interface. From more info no HTTPS, please
reefer to the IP Protocol sections.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.2.6 Quality of Service
QoS Type
Off
No QoS is used.
Diffserv
Diffserv QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
IP
IP Precedence QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
Precedence
IP Precedence Video
Used to define which priority audio, video, data and signaling should have in the network. The
higher the number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of
packets.
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
4
4
3
6
IP Type of Service (TOS) helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
Delay
Tells the router to minimize the delay.
Tells the router to maximize the throughput.
Tells the router to maximize the reliability.
Tells the router to minimize the cost.
Throughput
Reliability
Cost
IP Precedence Telephony
Used to define which priority audio should have in the network for telephone calls. The higher the
number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of packets.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio
4
Diffserv Video
Used to define which priority Audio, Video, Data and Signaling packets should have in an IP
network. The priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
Diffserv Telephony
Used to define which priority Audio packets should have in an IP network for telephone calls. The
priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.2.7 IEEE 802.1x
802.1X
The system may be connected to an IEEE 802.1x LAN network. Supported 802.1x protocols are
EAP-MD5, EAP-PEAP and EAP-TTLS. The 802.1x authentication are enabled by setting 802.1x
Mode to On.
On
Off
802.1x authentication enabled
802.1x authentication disabled
Anonymous Identity
The 802.1x Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP types that
support different tunneled identity, EAP-PEAP and EAP-TTLS. The anonymous ID, if set, will be
used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity Request.
Identity
The 802.1x Username is the username needed for 802.1x authentication.
Password
The 802.1x Password is the password needed for 802.1x authentication.
EAP-MD5
On
The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled
Off
The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled
EAP_TTLS
On
The EAP_TTLS protocol is enabled
Off
The EAP_TTLS protocol is disabled
EAP-PEAP
On
The EAP_PEAP protocol is enabled
Off
The EAP_PEAP protocol is disabled
Note that 802.1x wireless LAN is not supported.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
5.8.3
Network Profiles
This menu consists of 7 network profiles; a prefix and a suffix can be added for each profile. If
you add a prefix/suffix to a profile, this prefix/suffix will automatically be added in front/back of the
number being dialed.
Example:
0 is added as a Call Prefix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 012345678.
0 is added as a Call Suffix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 123456780.
Using the three last profiles you can enter the name of a profile, prefix/suffix and network
selection. This is useful if you have a fixed prefix/suffix for your service provider.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Settings
5.8.4
Data Port
The system provides up to two standard RS232 serial ports to allow a computer to be connected
for data transfer and control purposes. Note that when connecting to a PC the connecting cable
must be a straight through RS232 cable.
Baud Rate, Parity, Data bits and Stop bits
If you wish to connect a PC to Data port 1, you must ensure that the PC and the system are
identically configured. The available settings are:
Baud Rate
Parity
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
None, Odd, Even
Data bits
Stop bits
7, 8
1, 2
The control interface provided by the data port supports a subset of the Hayes command set as
well as a comprehensive set of system specific commands. It maintains communication with the
data port’s command interpreter at all times. All features available from the hand-held remote
control can be accessed through the data port.
Data Port 2
Data port 2 is dedicated to the main camera and will not be available in standard configuration.
The Data Port 2 menu contains the same items as the Data Port 1 menu; Baud rate, Parity, Data
bits, Stop bits except for the Mode, which has VISCA and Auto selections Mode.
The system will automatically detect WAVE cameras. If you are using a camera supporting the
VISCA protocol, select Mode: VISCA.
If Mode is Auto and no camera is connected to the Data port 2, the Baud rate, Parity, Data bits
and Stop bits settings will be enabled.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Peripheral Equipment
Using the optional peripheral devices outlined in this chapter and the many others available, you
will be able to build your own applications for use with the system, thereby better integrating the
system into your business environment. This chapter will explain how to connect peripheral
equipment to your system. First of all however, we recommend you examine Interfaces, with
details on the available connectors on the back of the system Codec.
Peripheral Equipment contains:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Interfaces
Document Camera
VCR / DVD
Additional Cameras
Additional Microphones
TANDBERG DNAM and Speakers
Stereo Speaker Kit
Telephone Add-On
Dual Monitor
XGA Monitors and Projectors
VESA Display Power Management
Digital Monitor Power Management
Extended Display Identification
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.1 Interfaces
6.1.1
Video
5 Video Inputs:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2 video inputs supporting S-Video through Mini-DIN connectors.
2 video inputs supporting composite signals through RCA connectors.
1 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) input, analog
or digital.
ƒ
(use VNC as a 6th video input).
The standard camera uses one of the S-Video inputs.
Levels:
ƒ
ƒ
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
The system will automatically adapt to a PAL or NTSC input.
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I in:
SVGA (800x600) 60Hz, 72Hz, 75Hz, 85Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60 Hz, 70Hz, 75Hz
SXGA (1280x1024) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
6 Video Outputs:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2 S-Video outputs, Mini-DIN connectors.
2 composite video outputs, RCA connectors.
2 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) output, analog
or digital.
The first Mini-DIN connector and the first RCA connector provide main video (incoming/outgoing
video and menus). The two other connectors provide selfview/snapshot/Duo Video. The S-Video
outputs are used by default by the monitors. The outputs are always active. The format of the
output will be either PAL or NTSC depending on your country’s standard video format.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
Levels:
ƒ
ƒ
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I out':
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
DVI and specifications:
DVI stands for Digital Video Interface, and is a form of video interface technology made to
maximize the quality of flat panel LCD monitors and high-end video graphics cards.
The TANDBERG codec contains a DVI-I plug that can transmit either digital DVI signals or
standard analog VGA signals, depending on what type of monitor is connected.
DVI Specifications
TANDBERG DVI-I follows the VESA Monitor Timing Standard v1.08, also knows as Display
Monitor Timing (DMT).
The resolution used when showing a PAL image like the WAVE II is:
ƒ
800x600 @ 75Hz.
The resolution used when showing a NTSC image like the WAVE II is:
1024x768 @ 60Hz.
ƒ
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Supported DVI cables:
TANDBERG supports DVI-D Single-Link, DVI-A and DVI-I Single-Link format cables.
DVI-D cables transmit digital T.M.D.S. signals, DVI-A cables transmit analog VGA signals and
DVI-I cables can transmit either digital or analog signals.
It is possible to extend existing DVI cables by the use of extension cables. The maximum cable
length however, is 5 meters. Going beyond that may result in quality loss.
Pin
1
Signal
Assignment
Pin
9
Signal
Assignment
Pin
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Signal
Assignment
T.M.D.S.
Data2-
T.M.D.S.
Data1-
T.M.D.S. Data0-
T.M.D.S. Data0+
2
T.M.D.S.
Data2+
10
11
12
13
14
15
T.M.D.S.
Data1+
3
T.M.D.S.
Data2/4 Shield
T.M.D.S.
Data1/3 Shield
T.M.D.S.
Data0/5 Shield
4
T.M.D.S.
Data4-
T.M.D.S.
Data3-
T.M.D.S. Data5-
T.M.D.S. Data5+
5
T.M.D.S.
Data4+
T.M.D.S.
Data3+
6
DDC Clock
+5V Power
T.M.D.S. Clock
Shield
7
DDC Data
Ground (return
for +5V, HSync
and VSync)
T.M.D.S. Clock+
8
Analog Vertical
Sync
16
Hot Plug Detect
24
T.M.D.S. Clock-
Analog Blue
C1
C4
Analog Red
C2
C5
Analog Green
C3
Analog
Horizontal
Sync
Analog Ground
(analog, R, G &
B return)
DVI-I - Combined Analog and Digital Connector Pin Assignments.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
The TANDBERG 6000 MXP Profile and 3000 MXP Profile* systems are shipped with a PC
cable with integrated audio:
DVI-A Plug + 2*RCA Plug to VGA Plug + 3.5mm Stereo Plug, length 6m.
PC cable, VGA - DVI with integrated audio
Signal name
CON.
3 Pin
CON.
1 Pin
CON.
5 Pin
CON.
2 Pin
CON.
4 Pin
Cable color
DDC Clock
DDC Data
6
7
15
12
14
9
Orange
White
Vertical Sync
DDC Power (+5V)
Digital return
RGB Red
8
Yellow
14, 16
15
Red
5, 10
1
Black
C1
C2
C3
C4
Red Coax
Green Coax
Blue Coax
Brown
RGB Green
RGB Blue
2
3
Horizontal Sync
13
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
RGB Return
C5
Shell
6, 7, 8
Shell
RGB Coax
Shield
Outer Shield
Ground
Outer Shield
Audio Left
Audio Right
Audio GND
Centre
Gnd
Tip
Audio Black
Audio Red
Ring
Centre
Gnd
Sleeve
Audio Shield
PC cable, VGA - DVI with integrated audio
* Applies to T3000 MXP Profile with new hardware.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
VGA to DVI-A Cable Pinouts*:
VGA to DVI-A cable male-male 5m black, maximum length 5m.
No
Item
Description
1
Cable
UL20276 3Coax*30#+IP*28#+5C*28#+AEB Black OD:7.0mm L-5000mm
HDD 15P Male Black
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector
Connector
Tube
HDD 17P Male Black
PE Tube Black OD:1.5*10 / 1.0*15 / 1.5*8 / 2.5*10 / 1.5*15 / 5.0*10 mm
HDD 15P Male OD:8.5mm
Metal Can
Metal Can
Ferrite
HDD 17P Male OD:8.5mm
RH 16*28.5*8.0mm
Screw
4-40UNC 4*47mm Molded PVC 30P Black
4-40UNC 4*47mm Molded PVC 30P Black
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A991826]
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A2K1188]
PVC Over mold 45P Black [A2K1017]
HDD 15P Dust Cover PE Mold [A2T0225]
DVI Dust Cover PE Mold [A2E1544]
Screw
10 Molded
11 Molded
12 Molded
13 Dust Cover
14 Dust Cover
* The TANDBERG 550MXP and TANDBERG 770 MXP do not support VGA in, but the endpoint can be setup to support
VGA out for a monitor.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.1.2
Audio
6 Audio Inputs:
ƒ
ƒ
3 microphone inputs (balanced, 24V phantom powered) via XLR connectors.
3 audio inputs (line level) via RCA connectors.
All audio inputs are active by default. For further information, refer to chapter Audio.
Audio input connector specification:
Connector label
Signal type
Microphone(s)
Audio input(s)
Balanced
Unbalanced
Connector (codec)
XLR-F, pin 1-gnd,
pin 2 hot, pin 3-
cold/neutral
Female RCA/phono,
sleeve-ground,
centre-signal
Input impedance
2400 ohms (pin 2 -
3)
10K ohms
Max input level when
set to minimum input
level
83 mVpp
15.5 Vpp
Max input level when
set to maximum
input level
6.2 mVpp
1.2 Vpp
Range, menu
adjustable input gain
22.5 dB (16 steps of
1.5 dB)
22.5 dB (16 steps of
1.5 dB)
Phantom power
voltage
24 V +/- 5%
1200 ohms
1200 ohms
12 mA
-
-
-
-
Phantom power
resistor, pin 2
Phantom power
resistor, pin 3
Max phantom power
current pr mic
3 Audio Outputs:
ƒ
1 output (line level) via RCA connector providing audio from far end, in addition to dial
tones. This output also supports S/PDIF. S/PDIF (Sony/Philips Digital Interface) is used
by the Digital Natural Audio module.
ƒ
1 AUX output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the AUX input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a telephone add-on system. When system is configured as
stereo, this output will provide the left stereo information.
ƒ
1 VCR output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the VCR input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a VCR. When system is configured as stereo, this output will
provide the right stereo information.
Audio output connector specification:
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
Connector label
Signal type
Audio outputs
Unbalanced
Connector (codec)
Female RCA/phono, sleeve-ground,
centre-signal
Output impedance
680 ohms
15.5 Vpp
Max output level when set
to maximum output level
and volume control set to
max.
1.2 Vpp
Max output level when set
to minimum output level and
volume control set to max.
Range, menu adjustable
output gain
22.5 dB (16 steps of 1.5 dB)*
Volume control attenuation
(audio out 1)
0 to 21 dB + mute (steps of 1.5 dB)
* Additional attenuation is possible on room/loudspeaker audio output using the volume control
setting
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.1.3
Network
Ethernet:
1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 4 or 6 Mbps depending on the
bandwidth option installed.
To connect the system to a LAN, use the Ethernet cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard
Ethernet cable).
The cable specification is:
1 ------------ 1
2 ------------ 2
3 ------------ 3
6 ------------ 6
If no LAN is available and the codec is connected directly to a computer, use a crossover cable.
The crossover cable specification is:
If such a connection is needed, the system and the PC must use ‘static’ TCP/IP settings because
no DHCP server is controlling the small “LAN”, which has been created between the computer
and the system. When configuring a back-to-back connection between the PC and the system,
make sure both static IP addresses exist on the same subnet.
ISDN BRI Interface:
ISDN I.420 (RJ-45 Jack) Basic Rate Interface S/T (2B+D), 128 kbps per ISDN I/F
To connect the system to BRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard BRI
cable).
The pinout of the S/T interface is:
BRI
Pinout
TX+
RX+
RX-
Pin-3
Pin-4
Pin-5
Pin-6
TX-
ISDN PRI Interface:
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate & Leased Line E1/T1 (G.703) Interface up to 2 Mbps
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate (for future use).
To connect the system to PRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard PRI
cable).
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
The pinout of the E1/T1 interface is:
PRI
Pinout
Crossover PRI
cable
Pin-1
Pin-2
Pin-4
Pin-5
RX+
RX-
TX-
4
5
1
2
TX+
Note! TANDBERG recommends always using category 5 cabling.
NET Interface:
1 x X.21 / V.35 / RS449 with 1 x RS366 Call Control up to 2 Mbps
Please see the Appendix 19: “Cable Specifications” for external net cables.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.1.4
Data port
The data port(s) are implemented as Data Communications Equipment (DCE). The connector
used are female 9-pin D-subs.
NOTE! Data port 2 is used by both Wave II Camera and Precision HD Camera and has different
pin-out scheme for the different use.
The TANDBERG main camera is normally connected to data port 2 and pin number 4 provides
12V DC / 1 Amps to the main camera. Otherwise the pin-outs for both data ports are the same.
Signal name
Direction
From DCE
From DCE
To DCE
Pin number
Carrier detect, CD
Receive data, RXD
Transmit data, TXD
Data terminal ready, DTR
Signal ground, GND
Data set ready, DSR
Ready to send, RTS
Clear to send, CTS
Ring indicator, RI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
From DCE
From DCE
To DCE
From DCE
From DCE
Data Port 2 with Precision HD Camera
Pin-outs for the THSI (TANDBERG High Speed Interface) on data port 2:
Signal name
Direction
To DCE
Pin number
Receive video +
Receive data, RXD
Transmit data, TXD
Power, 12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
From DCE
To DCE
Signal ground, GND
Receive video -
To DCE
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
6.2 Document Camera
A document camera can be used for showing text, diagrams and a variety of graphical material
as well as small three-dimensional objects.
How to use a document camera with your system:
1. Connect the document camera to the Doc Cam input, if available, on the system.
2. Open the Presentation menu from Menu and choose Doc Cam.
3. You can also program the Presentation key on the remote to activate document camera.
See chapter Presentation Key for more information.
If you want to use S-Video from the document camera, you can connect the document camera to
the AUX input on the system.
Note that this requires a system with an additional video input.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.3 DVD / VCR
DVD/VCR Playback
Mono
For playback, connect a cable between Video Out on the VCR and Video In (VCR) on the
system. Connect a cable between Audio Out on the VCR and the Audio In (VCR) on the system.
Choose VCR from the Presentation menu to activate the VCR input.
Make sure that Audio In (VCR) is On (see chapter Audio). If audio from VCR is too low, this level
can be adjusted in Audio Settings, Inputs, Level Settings. The audio from the VCR will be audible
in the local speaker system.
The audio from the VCR and your microphone(s) will be mixed and sent to the far end. When a
person talks on either local or far end, the VCR audio level will be reduced to make it easier to
comment on a video recording when Audio Settings, VCR Ducking: On.
DVD/VCR Recording
When recording a conference in stereo, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main
monitor, the local audio and the remote audio. It will record the conference in stereo if stereo
audio is used in the conference.
When recording a videoconference, connect a cable between Video Out 2 on the system and
Video In on the VCR. Connect a cable between Audio Out 2 on the system and Audio In on the
VCR.
For stereo recording, connect:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Video cable between Video Out 2 on the system to Video In on the VCR
Audio cable between Audio Out 2 (VCR L) to VCR/DVD Audio In (L)
Audio cable between Audio Out 3 (VCR R) to VCR/DVD Audio In (R)
Make sure that:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
That Stereo I/O Mode is set to On
128 AAC-LD is enabled
That AAC-LD is enabled
To enable VCR/DVD ducking (reduce volume when speaking), check that VCR Ducking
under Audio Settings is set to On.
When recording, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main monitor, the local audio
and the audio from the far end.
Note that a system with one video output and one mixed (local and far end) audio output is
required for recording. For playback, a system with one video input and one audio input
without integrated echo cancellation is required.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
6.4 Additional Cameras
Extra fixed Cameras
You can connect extra fixed cameras to your system, for example, a whiteboard camera. Connect
the video output of the additional camera to one of the available Video inputs on the system.
Multiple controllable Cameras
Attaching multiple cameras to one system expands visibility and is useful in large group
applications.
The system is able to control up to 4 WAVE II -cameras. Optional WAVE II cameras are supplied
with the necessary cabling. In addition, an external power supply for the camera is included.
WAVE II -camera number two must be connected to video input 2. Camera number three must be
connected to video input 3, and so forth.
The maximum length of the camera cable for multiple cameras supported by TANDBERG is 20 m
(65 ft).
Note that additional controllable cameras are only available for some rollabout systems.
Settops and personal systems may be able to connect additional cameras.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.5 Additional Microphones
If your environment is such that you require more than one microphone for your room, e.g. you
have a whiteboard at a distance from your table microphone, it is possible to connect additional
microphones to your system. See Appendix 4 for more information.
Note that this requires a system with more than one XLR input.
You can connect up to three additional microphones to your system for a total of 4 microphones.
The connectors are marked Mic1, Mic2, Mic3 (Mic 1-3 XLR) and 4 (RCA Input). The connected
microphones will by default be mixed.
When more than one microphone is connected, you have the option to use the Voice Activate
Camera Tracking feature.
Audio Science Microphone
TANDBERG's award-winning Audio Science microphone is a ceiling-mounted, wide coverage,
boundary microphone, which can eliminate the need for table microphones. It is designed to pick
up the audio from all conference participants seated within in its pick-up area, defined by a
quarter-sphere of approximately 14-foot (4.25m) radius extended in front of, and to the sides of
the microphone.
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.6 The TANDBERG DNAM and
Speakers
TANDBERG 6000 MXP Profile, TANDBERG 6000 MXP, TANDBERG 7000
MXP, TANDBERG 8000 MXP and TANDBERG Maestro
The TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module, DNAM*:
The DNAM audio system is built on two specially designed and separate modules; the DNAM
audio amplifier and the DNAM loudspeaker cabinet. The DNAM loudspeaker cabinet is based on
several editions, one for each of the 6000 MXP, 6000 MXP Profile, 7000 MXP and 8000 MXP
systems. For the 6000 MXP and the 8000 MXP system, the audio amplifier is integrated in the
loudspeaker cabinet. For the Maestro system the amplifier and the loudspeaker cabinet is
integrated directly into the system pedestal.
TANDBERG 6000 MXP DNAM configuration
TANDBERG 7000 MXP DNAM
configuration
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
TANDBERG 8000 MXP DNAM configuration
TANDBERG 6000 MXP Profile DNAM configuration
Center Speakers + Integrated Stereo Speakers
The DNAM Amplifier*:
ƒ
ƒ
3 x 50W continuous average Center Output Power (load specified by DNAM Center
Speakers).
2 x 50W continuous average Stereo Output Power (load specified by TANDBERG
Loudspeaker Stereo Kit).
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Full dynamic range for audio (high fidelity range)
Digital Signal Processing and Filtering on all channels for best audio detail clarity
Digital Crossover Filtering on center channels.
In/out:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Audio In - S/PDIF (stereo) or Analog (mono), using the same connector.
Differential In - (female XLR pinout: 1 - GND, 2 – Signal (+), 3 – Signal (-))
Loop Out - line out directly from the input, always analog even with S/PDIF in.
Stereo Out - (male XLR, common GND configuration)
ƒ
Fuse 2A 250V Slow, 5 x 20mm, Littelfuse type 215002.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The DNAM Loudspeaker Cabinet (Center Speakers)*:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
3-way Center Speaker system
Frequency range 50Hz - 20kHz
2 x 130mm low- and midrange loudspeakers, 8 ohms nominal, high quality
1 x 25mm dome tweeter, 6 ohms nominal, high quality
Crossover filtered audio signals received from DNAM amplifier
Long time max power 90 Watt on all loudspeakers
Enclosed MDF speaker cabinet
Integrated Stereo Speakers**:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2 * 15W Stereo Speakers, high quality
Frequency range 100Hz - 20kHz
Enclosed MDF speaker cabinet
Using the external and optional Stereo Speaker Kit will improve the stereo sound, even on
systems with integrated stereo speakers**. Note that the kit is not available for Mini-DNAM
described below. Before connecting the Stereo Speaker Kit, make sure the complete
videoconferencing system is powered down. When connecting the Stereo Speaker Kit to a
system with already integrated stereo speakers, these integrated speakers will be disabled, and a
new filter and specification setup is loaded when powering up the videoconferencing system.
Please refer to the section Stereo Speaker Kit for details.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
TANDBERG 3000 MXP Profile:
The TANDBERG Mini-DNAM*:
The Mini-DNAM audio system is built on two specially designed and separate modules; the Mini-
DNAM amplifier and the Mini-DNAM loudspeaker cabinet. The Mini-DNAM loudspeaker cabinet is
stereo-configured and based on two versions made for fitting both the TANDBERG 3000 Profile
43’’ and 32’’ systems. The compact sized amplifier is mounted in the rear of the speaker cabinet.
The Mini-DNAM amplifier*:
The Mini-DNAM amplfier specification:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Stereo digital SPDIF input
2x30W into 8ohm
External DC power supply
Compact size
The Mini-DNAM Loudspeaker Cabinet*:
The Mini-DNAM speaker cabinet
specification:
ƒ
2 * 15W Stereo Speakers, high
quality
ƒ
ƒ
Frequency range 100Hz - 20kHz
Enclosed MDF speaker cabinet
Integrated Stereo Speakers**:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2 * 15W Stereo Speakers, high quality
Frequency range 100Hz - 20kHz
Enclosed MDF speaker cabinet
*Note that there are different solutions on integrated audio modules and speakers included in the larger high-end
TANDBERG systems. Please contact your TANDBERG representative for more information.
** These are available with the TANDBERG 3000 MXP Profile and TANDBERG 6000 MXP Profile only.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.7 Stereo Speaker Kit
Note that the following applies only for systems with a stereo S/PDIF output.
The Stereo Speaker Kit provides an pair of floor-standing loudspeakers in addition to the built-in
DNAM. Using these speakers will enable stereo functionality in your system and thereby enhance
the sound experience.
To experience stereo sound, the stereo speakers have to be connected to the Digital Natural
Audio Module (DNAM) as well as confirming this under Stereo Settings in the main audio menu.
The stereo sound source may either be located at the far end, or locally as a sound source (CD,
DVD) connected to the codec audio AUX/VCR inputs. If using a local stereo sound source, you
also have to enable Stereo I/O mode (On) in the same audio menu, to be able to receive stereo
sound on your system, and to send stereo signals to the far end. See chapter 4.5.4 for more
information.
Check also that the full-range frequency audio coding AAC-LD is enabled (In Call Quality menu,
AAC-LD is checked, and AAC-LD 128 threshold is the same or lower than the call rate you are
planning to use). See chapter Audio Algorithm and AAC-LD 128kbps for more information.
An installation sheet is enclosed in the Stereo Loudspeaker Kit, which also describes
recommended physical speaker placement. Make sure the complete videoconferencing system is
powered down before connecting the Stereo Speaker Kit.
Note that if stereo speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, or having other speakers than the TANDBERG stereo
speakers, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
Stereo Speaker Kit specification:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
2-way Stereo Speaker system (dual speakers in low- and midrange)
Passive Crossover Filtering.
Frequency range 50Hz - 20kHz
2 x 130mm low- and midrange loudspeakers, 8 ohms nominal, high quality.
1 x 25mm dome tweeter, 6 ohms nominal, high quality
Long time max power 90 Watt on all loudspeakers
Enclosed aluminum speaker cabinet
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.8 Telephone Add-On
The system has a built in audio bridge* that can bring in Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony or normal
telephone sites using ISDN.
Note that this requires a system with mixed audio output (audio from local and far end) and
one audio input without integrated echo cancelling.
In addition to using ISDN and IP for your telephone sites, it is possible to connect a telephone
using normal POTS line** by
ƒ
ƒ
Connect the audio out from the conference telephone to the AUX input.
Connect the audio input from the conference telephone to the AUX output, which
provides a mixed signal between local and far end.
*optional MultiSite package available
** require a conference phone with external audio input and output
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.10 XGA Monitors and Projectors
(Optional)
Some TANDBERG systems can be delivered with optional single or dual TV/XGA monitors. It can
also be connected to any DVI/VGA/PAL or NTSC display.
Note that this requires a system with minimum one DVI-I output.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
6.11 VESA Display Power
Management
Because of the tremendous amount of energy consumed by monitors when operating, the system
will reduce power consumption and extend monitor lifecycle by suspending the (switch off)
monitors and projectors when the system goes into sleep/standby.
This applies for all VESA Display Power Management compliant displays that are connected to
the VGA/DVI output of the system. The display device need to comply with VESA display Power
Management system (DPMS).
Note that this requires a system supplied with a VGA/DVI output.
The VESA DPMS standard consists of four modes, Normal, Standby, Suspend and Off, and
applies to all Sync formats (e.g. VGA).
DPMS standard:
Normal
Standby
Suspend
Off
H-sync
On
Off
On
Off
V-sync
On
On
Off
Off
Power savings
Recovery time
None
None
Minimal
2-3 seconds
Substantial
2-3 seconds
Maximum
8-10 seconds
In Off mode some power may still be drawn in order to power indicator lights etc. EDID contains
the information on which mode a specific monitor supports.
TANDBERG supports all four modes. However, in F1 and above, all monitors not listed below are
automatically set to Off.
Monitor
DPMS mode
Dell
Off
T8000 - Pioneer
T6000 - SAMPO
Maestro - Projection Design
T7000 - Sharp
Suspend
Suspend
Off
Off
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
6.12 Digital Monitor Power
Management
DMPM is monitor power management applied over the digital DVI interface. TANDBERG
supports DMPM in software F2 and above. Six monitor power states are defined.
Monitor On Power state
Transmitter (TANDBERG codec) and receiver (Monitor) are powered and active. This power state
is equivalent with the DPMS normal mode.
Intermediate Power state
When the codec goes from active to standby, it turns off the DVI transmitter and the monitor can
go from Monitor On
Power state to Intermediate Power state
Active-off Power state
The monitor can go from Intermediate Power state to Active-off Power state when the monitor
timer expires.
Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State
The monitor can enter Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State when the codec is switched off or if
the DVI cable is disconnected. This power state is equivalent to the DPMS “Off (with no DPMS
recovery)” state.
Monitor Power Switch Off Power state
This state can be entered when the power switch on the monitor is toggled to its off position. This
state has two sub-states dependent on if the codec is switched on or off.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Equipment
6.13 Extended Display Identification
Data (EDID)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that will allow the
system to communicate its capabilities, including vendor information like the supported VGA-
formats and frequency range limits to a PC connected to the XGA/DVI input.
Note that this requires a system supplied with a XGA/DVI input.
This means that the PC always* will be able to output a valid VGA/DVI signal to the system with
no manual reconfiguration of the PC screen settings.
TANDBERG supports EDID structure v1.3, which adheres to the MS Plug & Play definition.
This standard contains information on product ID, basic display parameters, timing identifications
and detailed timing descriptions.
In F1 and above, TANDBERG will use the EDID information to decide which resolution to use,
800x600 @ 75Hz or 1024x768 @ 60Hz.
Example (1024x768@60Hz)
Detailed timing description:
PixelClockDiv10000:
Horizontal Active:
Horizontal Blanking:
Vertical Active:
6500
1024
320
768
38
Vertical Blanking:
Horizontal Sync
Offset:
24
Horizontal Sync Pulse
Width:
136
Vertical Sync Offset:
3
6
Vertical Sync Pulse
Width:
Horizontal Image
Size:
Not available
Vertical Image Size:
Horizontal Border:
Vertical Border:
Not available
0
0
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Tested and verified monitors, EDID & Timing
Listed below are some of the monitors TANDBERG have tested and verified against:
ADI A715
Dell W1700
Dell W1900
EIZO L367
EIZO F730
ErgoScan 400S
Hitachi CM640ET
Hitachi CM769ET
IBM 9494-HBO
IBM G97
IBM E74
IBM 6743-60N
JVC LT-23X475
JVC LT-23C50BU
JVC LT-23X576
LG L3200A
LG M3200C
Löewe TAA112747
MAG D700
MAG DJ707
Panasonic SL75
Pioneer PDP-50MXE10
Pioneer PDP-42MXE10-S
Pioneer PDP-43MXE1-S
Pioneer PDP-50MXE11
Samsung 191T
Samsung 323T
*Need to comply with the VESA EDID standard.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appendices
Appendices:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Appendix 1: Technical Specification
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information
Appendix 3: Environmental considerations
Appendix 4: Guidelines for setting up rooms for video meetings
Appendix 5: Security
Appendix 6: Using the file system
Appendix 7: Web Interface
Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network adapters
Appendix 11: TANDBERG Cameras
Appendix 12: Remote control
Appendix 13: Cisco CallManager registration
Appendix 14: Diagnostic Tools for IP
Appendix 15: System Upgrade
Appendix 16: Declaration of Conformity
Appendix 17: Dimensions
Appendix 18: Protocols Supported
Appendix 19: Cable Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 1: Technical Specifications
Technical Specification
EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION
UNIT DELIVERED COMPLETE WITH:
H.320 and H.323 point-to-point and multipoint calls
2 x 30" widescreen LCD monitors, wireless remote
Standards-based: H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, DES and
control, Tracker, W.A.V.E. II camera, microphone, Audio
AES
ModuleTM, integrated cabling and stand
NIST-validated AES
NIST-validated DES
MONITORS
Automatic key generation and exchange
Dual 30" LCD monitors
Supported in Dual Stream & MultiSite
16:9 high resolution widescreen format
IP NETWORK FEATURES
BANDWIDTH
IEEE 802.1x/EAP Network Authentication
H.320 up to 2 Mbps
H.235 Gatekeeper Authentication
H.323 up to 4 Mbps point-to-point
DNS lookup for service configuration
SIP up to 4 Mbps
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)
Up to 6 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth
IP precedence
IP type of service (ToS)
FIREWALL TRAVERSAL
TANDBERG ExpresswayTM Technology
IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
Auto NAT
control)
Auto gatekeeper discovery
H.460.18, H.460.19 Firewall Traversal
Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
H.245 DTMF tones in H.323
VIDEO STANDARDS
H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.263++ (Natural Video), H.264
Cisco CallManager integration using ECS
IP Address Conflict Warning
VIDEO FEATURES
Native 16:9 Widescreen
Date and Time support via NTP
Advanced Screen Layouts
Call Services
Picture in Picture (PIP)
Picture outside Picture & Large POP
Side by Side
IPv6 NETWORK SUPPORT
Dual Stack IPv4 and IPv6 simultaneous support Net
PC Zoom
service support on IPv6: Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS,
Intelligent Video Management
ftp, SNMP, DNS, NTP, DHCP
Media support on IPv6: H.323, SIP, Streaming
Simultaneous videoconference & local PC mode
Local Auto Layout
SECURITY FEATURES
Management via HTTPS and SSH
IP Administration Password
Menu Administration Password
Dialing Access code
Streaming password
H.243 MCU Password
VNC password
VIDEO INPUTS (5 INPUTS)
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main camera
1 x HD Main Camera (optional)
1 x MiniDin, S-video: auxiliary/document camera
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: document camera/aux
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: VCR
1 x DVI-I: PC
Input: 800 x 600 (@ 60, 72, 75, 85 Hz), 1024 x 768 (@
60, 70, 75 Hz), 1280 x 720 (HD720P) (@ 50, 60 Hz)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
SNMP security alerts
Disable IP services
MD-5 Challenge
Network Settings protection
SIP Authentication via NTLM
SIP Authentication via Digest
VIDEO OUTPUTS (6 OUTPUTS)
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main monitor
1 x MiniDin, S-video: dual monitor
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: main monitor or VCR
1 x RCA/Phono, composite: dual monitor or VCR
NETWORK INTERFACES
6 x ISDN BRI (RJ-45), S-interface
2 x DVI-I/XGA: main and dual monitor
1 x E1/T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for ISDN PRI or Leased E1/T1
XGA Output
mode: Manual or Auto (Data Triggered)
1 x E1/T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for future usage
1 x LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit (LAN/DSL/cable
800 x 600 @ 75hz, 1024 x 768 @ 60 hz, 1280 x 768
(WXGA) @ 60 hz, 280 x 720 (HD720p) @ 60 Hz
VESA Monitor Power Management
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
modem)
VIDEO FORMAT
NTSC, PAL, VGA, SVGA, XGA, W-XGA, SXGA and
HD720p
1 x X.21/V.35/RS-449 with RS-366 dialing, RS-366
Adtran IMUX, Leased Line, Data Triggered, and Manual
1 x USB for future usage
LIVE VIDEO RESOLUTIONS
NATIVE NTSC:
400p (528 x 400 pixels)
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced SIF (iSIF 352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
ETHERNET/INTERNET/INTRANET CONNECTIVITY
TCP/IP, DHCP, ARP, FTP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS,
SOAP and XML, MD-5 Challenge
SNMP Enterprise Management
Internal web server
Internal streaming server
NATIVE PAL:
448p (576 x 448 pixels)
OTHER MAJOR STANDARDS SUPPORTED
H.231, H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, H.239, H.241,
H.243, H.281, BONDING (ISO 13871), H.320, H.323,
H.331
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced CIF (iCIF 352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
RFC 3261, RFC 2237, RFC 3264, RC 3311, RFC 3550,
RFC 2032, RFC 2190, RFC 2429, RFC 3407
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels) decode only
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS:
XGA (1024 x 768)
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels)
VGA (640 x 480 pixels)
W.A.V.E. (WIDE ANGLE VIEW) II CAMERA
10 x zoom 1/4" CCD +15°/-20° tilt +/-95°pan
61° vertical field of view
WIDE RESOLUTIONS:
96° total vertical field of view
w288p (512 x 288 pixels)
77° horizontal field of view
w448p (768 x 448 pixels)
w576p (1024 x 576 pixels)
w720p (1280 x 720 pixels)
267° total horizontal field of view
460 (PAL)/470 (NTSC) TV lines
Min. illumination 2 Lux (F1.8)
Auto or manual focus/brightness/white balance
Far-end camera control
STILL IMAGE TRANSFER
CIF, SIF, 4CIF (H.261 Annex D), 4SIF, VGA, SVGA,
XGA
15 near and far-end camera pre-sets
Voice-activated camera positioning
Daisy chain support for up to 4 cameras
AUDIO STANDARDS
G.711, G.722, G.722.1, G.728, 64 bit & 128 bit MPEG4
AAC-LD
CLOSED CAPTIONING/TEXT CHAT
T.140 text chat available from RS-232,Telnet, SSH, Web
and User Interface
AUDIO FEATURES
CD-Quality 20 KHz Mono and Stereo
Telephone add-on via MultiSite
Four separate acoustic echo cancellers
Audio mixer
PRESENTATIONS AND COLLABORATION
Natural Presenter Package including:
PC Presenter (DVI-I, SXGA In)
PC SoftPresenter
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
Automatic Noise Reduction
Audio level meters
Digital Clarity & Native Formats
Advanced Video Layouts
Streaming compatible with Cisco IP/TV,
Apple QuickTime®, RealPlayer® v8 etc.
VCR ducking
Optional Stereo Package
Packet loss management
Active lip synchronization
GSM/Blackberry interference audio feature
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
Support for the TANDBERG Management Suite
Total management via embedded web server, SNMP,
SSH, Telnet, XML, SOAP and FTP
Remote software upload: via web server, ftp server or
ISDN
1 x RS-232 local control and diagnostics
Remote control and on-screen menu system
External Services from TMS
AUDIO INPUTS (4 INPUTS)
3 x microphone, 24V phantom powered, XLR connector,
each with separate echo cancellers
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: separate echo canceller
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR/DVD
Stereo L)
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: VCR/DVD (Stereo R)
DIRECTORY SERVICES
Support for Local directories (My Contacts), Corporate
Directory and Global Directory
AUDIO OUTPUTS (3 OUTPUTS)
1 x RCA/Phono, S/PDIF (mono/stereo) or Analogue Line
Level: main audio or Analogue Stereo L
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: auxiliar y
(or Analogue Stereo R or VCR Stereo L)
1 x RCA/Phono, Line Level: VCR (mono or Stereo R)
Unlimited entries using Server directory supporting
LDAP and H.350*
Unlimited number for Corporate directory (through TMS)
400 number global directory
200 number local directory
16 dedicated MultiSite entries
FRAME RATES
Received Calls with Date and Time
Directories in Local Languages
Placed Calls with Date and Time
Missed Calls with Date and Time
30 frames per second @ 168 kbps and above
60 fields per second @ 336 kbps and above (Point-to-
point)
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
DUAL STREAM
DuoVideo
H.239 Dual Stream
Available on H.323 & H.320
Available in Multisite from any site
Dynamic bandwidth adjustment (H.323)
16 SELECTABLE MENU LANGUAGES
Arabic, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, English,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Suomi, Swedish and
Thai Chinese, Korean and Japanese Input Method
Editor
Import Custom Language through TMS
NETWORK FEATURES
Auto H.320/H.323 dialing
SIP
CUSTOMIZED WELCOME SCREEN AND COMPANY
LOGO
Downspeeding
Picture JPEG (logo.jpg): Recommended maximum size
is 704x576 for Welcome Screen and 352x288 for
Encryption Required Screen
Programmable network profiles
Intelligent Call Management
HO on ISDN-PRI Facility
Maximum call length timer
Automatic SPID and line number configuration (National
ISDN, GR-2941-CORE)
SoftMux
POWER
100 - 250 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz 65 watts max. for codec and
500 watts max. per monitor
250 watts for DNAM
NATO standard KG194/KIV-7 encryptor support
H.331 Broadcast Mode
URI Dialing
OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
0° C to 35° C (32° F to 95° F) ambient temperature
10% to 90% Relative Humidity (RH)
MULTISITE FEATURES
H.323/H.320/SIP/Telephony/VoIP in the same
conference
Audio and Video TranscodingTF
Video rate matching from 56 kbps - maximum
conference rate
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE
-20° C to 60° C (-4° F to 140° F) at RH 10-90% (non-
condensing)
APPROVALS
CP4, CP 5 + 1 and Voice Switched
Best Impression (Automatic CP Layouts)
H.264, Encryption, Digital Clarity
Dual Stream from any site
ISDN & IP Downspeeding and IPLR
MultiSite (H.243) Cascading on H.320 & H.323
Unicode H.243 Terminal Names
Dial in/Dial out
Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
- Standard EN 60950
Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
- Standard EN 55022, Class B
- Standard EN 55024
- Standard EN 61000-3-2/-3-3
Directive 1999/5/EEC (R&TTE Directive)
- Standard TBR3
Chair control for host system
- Standard TBR4
Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG)
Snapshot of ongoing DuoVideo/H.239 presentation
(JPEG)
Approved according to UL 60950
and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950
Complies with FCC15B Class B
Separate welcome page for encrypted conferences
Conference rates up to 6 Mbps
Up to 6 video and 5 audio sites
4 sites @ 2 Mbps, 6 sites @ 768 (+telephone calls)
Mix ISDN (BRI or PRI), or Serial Interface (V.35) with IP
up to maximum conference rate
FOOTPRINT
Width: 28.3"/72 cm
Depth: 23.8"/60.5 cm
PRODUCT RELIABILITY / MTBF
The predicted reliability is expressed in the expected random Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for the electronic
components based on the Power On Hours:
Power On Hours (POH) > 69 000 hours
Useful Life Cycle > 6 years
ISO 9001 certificate is available upon request
* Requires TANDBERG Management Suite 9.0 or newer
System features vary depending on network selection and software package. All specifications are subject to change
without notice. TANDBERG is a registered trademark or trademark of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries.
RealPlayer is a trademark or a registered trademark of RealNetworks, Inc. QuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and NetMeeting are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are property of their
respective owners. Contains iTypeTM from Agfa Monotype Corporation
Service availability may vary from region to region. Please contact your TANDBERG reseller for more information.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information
for TANDBERG Endpoints
Bandwidth information for TANDBERG endpoints
Model
8000MXP, 7000MXP
6000MXP, Maestro
Bandwidth
Point to point
ISDN / IP
Standard: 768 / 3072
Option: 1920 / 4096
Standard: 768 / 3072
Option: 1920 / 4096
MultiSite
Total: 3072kbps 4x768
video + 4 audio 3x1536
video + no audio
Total: 3072kbps 4x768
video + 4 audio 3x1536
video + no audio
Total: 6144kbps 6x1152
video + 5 audio 5x1536
video + no audio 4x1920
video + 5 audio 3x3072
video + no audio
Total: 6144kbps 6x1152
video + 5 audio 5x1536
video + no audio 4x1920
video + 5 audio 3x3072
video + no audio
Rate Matching
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /
H.239)
Secure Conference
H.264
All bandwidths
Up to 2Mbps
All bandwidths
Up to 2Mbps
Picture Mode MultiSite
VS, CP4, CP5+1
VS, CP4, CP5+1
Model
3000MXP / 3000NET MXP
2000MXP, 1500MXP
Bandwidth
Point to point
ISDN / IP
Standard: 384 / 1536
Option: 512 / 1920
3000NET: 384 / 1536
Standard: 1920 (IP only)
Options: 512 / 1920
MultiSite
Total: 1536kbps
4x512 video + no audio
4x384 video + 3 audio
Total: 2304kbps 4x768
video + no audio 4x512
video + 3 audio
Total: 2304kbps 4x768
video + no audio 4x512
video + 3 audio
Rate Matching
Yes
Yes
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /
H.239)
Yes
Yes
Secure Conference
All bandwidths
All bandwidths
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
H.264
Up to 2Mbps
Up to 2Mbps
Picture Mode MultiSite
VS, CP4, CP5+1
VS, CP4, CP5+1
Model
990MXP / 990NET MXP
880MXP / 880NET MXP
Bandwidth
Point to point
ISDN / IP
Standard: 1920 (IP only)
Options: 512 / 1920
990NET: 768 / 1920
Standard: 1152 (IP only)
Option: 384 / 1152
MultiSite
Total: 2304kbps 4x768
video + no audio 4x512
video + 3 audio
Total: 1152kbps 4x384
video + no audio 4x320
video + 3 audio
Rate Matching
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /
H.239)
Secure Conference
H.264
All bandwidths
Up to 2Mbps
All bandwidths
Up to 768
Picture Mode MultiSite
VS, CP4, CP5+1
VS, CP4, CP5+1
Model
770MXP
1000MXP
Bandwidth
Point to point
ISDN / IP
Standard: 768 (IP only)
Option: 128 / 768
Standard: 768 (IP only)
Options: 128 / 768, 384 /
768
MultiSite
Not Available
Not Available
Yes
Not Available
Not Available
Yes
Rate Matching
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /
H.239)
Secure Conference
All bandwidths
All bandwidths
H.264
Up to 768
Up to 768
Picture Mode MultiSite
Not Available
Not Available
Model
550MXP
Bandwidth
Point to point
ISDN / IP
Standard: 768 (IP only)
Options: 128 / 768, 384 /
768
MultiSite
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Rate Matching
Dual Stream (DuoVideo /
H.239)
Secure Conference
H.264
All bandwidths
Up to 768
Picture Mode MultiSite
Not Available
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 3: Environmental
Considerations
Environmental considerations
This section explains how to carry out basic adjustments and simple tests to ensure that you send
and receive the best possible image and audio quality when using your system.
Iris control and lighting
By default the system camera will use an automatic iris to compensate for changes in lighting. In
addition to this feature, you may further assist the system to maintain the best possible image
quality by paying special attention to environmental lighting and background colors as described
below. Remember the system will send live images of yourself and your immediate surroundings.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Avoid direct sunlight on the subject matter i.e. yourself, the background or onto the
camera lens as this will create harsh contrasts.
If light levels are too low you may need to consider using artificial lighting. As described
above, direct illumination of the subject matter and camera lens should be avoided.
When using artificial lighting, daylight type lamps will produce the most effective results.
Avoid colored lighting.
Indirect light from shaded sources or reflected light from pale walls often produces
excellent results.
Avoid harsh side lighting or strong light from above. Strong sunlight from a window or
skylight may put part or all of the subject matter in shadow or cause silhouetting.
If you still have problems with the iris and lighting, manual adjustment of the camera
parameters might help – see Video Settings menu.
Dim scenes can also be improved by manually adjusting the camera brightness setting.
Background
The appearance of the picture background is very important but easily overlooked. It is important
to remember that the camera also shows what is behind you when in a videoconference. To
ensure a suitable background we recommend you consider the following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Use a neutrally colored background with a medium contrast and a soft texture, e.g. a
plain curtain with no heavy patterns or strong colors that may adversely tint the whole
scene.
Avoid moving backgrounds such as curtains blowing in a draught, moving objects, or
people walking behind as this may both reduce image quality and distract the attention of
the calling party.
Do not place the camera facing a doorway.
Loudspeaker volume
The audio system will use the Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) if available and supported by
the system. The volume of the audio system is controlled by the Volume Control keys on the
system remote control.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 4: Guidelines for Setting up
Rooms for Video Meetings
Guidelines for setting up rooms for video meetings
The following are a set of guidelines to consider when either building a video meeting room, or
using an existing room for video meetings.
Lighting:
Audio:
ƒ
Low Contrast desired for light
ƒ
Noise Floor preferred less than
44dBC.
Reverb Time 0,3 to 0,5 sec.
intensity. No dark spots.
Intensity @ table 800 - 1400 Lux as
measured with an Incident light
meter.
ƒ
ƒ
Ventilation:
ƒ
ƒ
Keep in mind Noise Floor.
Velocity = Noise. Therefore keep
velocity of air low.
ƒ
Block sunlight from entering room.
Seating Area (Table):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Should allow all participants to see
Monitors.
Should allow camera to “see” all
participants.
Non-shiny non-patterned preferably
light grey surface (if table used).
Room:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Should be located away from noise.
Should not have windows.
Doors should be located off camera.
Walls:
ƒ
Color: Generally high contrast color
desired. Light blue is commonly
used.
ƒ
Acoustically reflective surfaces (such
as glass or concrete) should be
covered with curtains or sound
treatment.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
How to prepare a typical room for videoconferencing:
The diagram below shows a typical room designed to obtain the best results when using the
system.
The microphone should be placed at the front of the table to ensure that all speech will be
detected. The best position for the microphone is at least 2 meters (6.5 feet) in front of the system
on a plain, flat table with at least 0.3 meters (12 inches) of table in front of the microphone.
The document camera should be close to the chair person or a designated controller of the
document camera for ease of use (remember to arrange all the peripherals so that one participant
can reach each of them to point, change the display, tape, and so forth).
The camera supports up to 15 pre-stored camera positions.
The illustration shows three possible camera positions; one for all the participants, one for the
whiteboard and one for the main speaker. The remaining camera presets are then available for
other peripheral equipment, for example a VCR.
Position the system in such a way as to avoid the possibility of somebody inadvertently walking
into the camera’s field of view when entering the room. Other than the conference participants,
there should be no moving items in the sent image.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 5: Security
Security
The system has several features both to protect from unauthorized use and system access:
Access Code:
When Access Code is enabled, the user will be asked to enter an access code before he/she is
able to make a call. The system will verify if the entered access code is valid by checking the
code with the allowed codes listed in the access.txt file on the ftp-server in the system. If no
access.txt file is uploaded to the system, registration of the code will be done without validation.
E.g. you can enter whatever code you want and have access to the system.
The access.txt file is a plain text file with one line per access code as shown below:
1234
1250
A1
B2
ABC
To upload this file to the system, follow these steps:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Open a DOS-window and go to the folder where the ‘access.txt’ file is located.
Type ftp <IP-address of your local system).
User: press Enter or enter IP-password.
Type “bin” and press Enter.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the ‘access.txt’ file, type ‘put access.txt’.
Exit from ftp, type "bye".
Administrator Password
Access to the administrator menu on the system unit can be controlled using password
protection. You can set the Administrator Password in Menu Settings, in Security or from the
dataport:
menupassword set <pin-code>. The pin-code should be maximum 5 - five digits. To erase the
password, enter an empty pin-code.
Streaming password
By setting a streaming password in the streaming menu on the system, a password has to be
entered on the streaming client to be able to see the video stream from the system.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
IP Password
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. This password can be enabled from telnet or dataport using the
command: ippassword <ip-password>. The default IP username and password is "TANDBERG".
To remove this password, use the command: "ippassword ”. From telnet, this is only possible by
first entering the correct password.
IP Services
The different IP services on the system - FTP, Telnet, Telnet Challenge, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP
and H.323 can be disabled to prevent access to the system. By using the commands below, the
services can be independently enabled/disabled:
xconfiguration Telnet/TelnetChallenge/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS/H323 Mode: <On/Off>
xconfiguration TelnetChallenge Mode: <On/Off> [port]
xconfiguration SNMP Mode: <On/Off/ReadOnly/TrapsOnly>
SNMP Security alert
This function will notify any Management Application (such as TMS - TANDBERG Management
Suite) if anyone tries to perform Remote Management on the system using an illegal password.
The Security alert that is sent to the Management Application will contain information about the IP
address and the service (WEB, Telnet, FTP) being used for the attempt. If TMS is used, email
notifications or alarms about the attempt can be sent to specified persons.
Encryption
All TANDBERG systems support both AES and DES encryption. By default this feature is
enabled such that when connecting with any other video system or MCU, a TANDBERG system
will attempt to establish a secure conference using AES or DES encryption. The TANDBERG
system will attempt this for both IP and ISDN connections. Where a remote system or MCU
supports encryption, the highest common encryption algorithm will be selected on a port-by-port
basis.
The type and status of the encryption negotiated is indicated by padlock symbols and on-screen
messages. Encryption on the TANDBERG systems is fully automatic, and provides clear security
status indicators;
ƒ
An open padlock indicates that encryption is being initialized, but the conference is not
yet encrypted.
ƒ
ƒ
Single padlock indicates DES encryption.
Double padlock indicates AES encryption.
In addition to on-screen indicators the Call Status menu provides two information fields regarding
call encryption. The first field is the Encryption Code, which will identify either AES or DES. The
second field is the Encryption Check Code and is comprised of an alphanumeric string. This
string will be the same for systems on either side of an encrypted conference. If the Check Codes
do not match, this would indicate that the call has been exposed to a Man In The Middle attack.
When a system with MultiSite functionality hosts a conference, the highest possible encryption
algorithm will be negotiated on a site-by-site basis. MultiSite conferences can therefore support a
mix of AES and DES encrypted endpoints in the same conference. A conference will only be as
secure as its weakest link.
All systems supporting DES encryption can upgrade to AES encryption. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more information. The standards supporting the encryption
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
mechanisms employed by TANDBERG are: AES, DES, H.233, H234 and H.235 (H235v3 & v2 for
backwards compatibility) with extended Diffie Hellman key distribution via H.320, H.323 and
Leased Line connections.
The TANDBERG AES implementation is validated as conforming to the Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) Algorithm, as specified in Federal Information Processing Standard Publication
197, Advanced Encryption Standard, by The National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST).
IEEE 802.1x / EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
This is a standard for authentication and authorization of units/systems onto the network.
Static configuration
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
System ID and Password
Anonymous ID for encryption challenge
Enable methods
Supported methods
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
MD5 (simple challenge)
PEAP (encrypted channel)
TTLS
Note that 802.1x wireless LAN is not supported.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 6: Using the File System
Using the file system
It is possible to access a file system within the TANDBERG system by using ftp:
DOS-
window:
ftp <IP-address of system>, or
ftp:// <IP-address of system>
Web-
browser:
Description of the different files:
all.prm
all settings in the system (including directory)
dir.prm
event.log
sw.pkg
directory entries (up to 200 entries)
logs fault situations etc.
the system software
globdir.prm file containing up to 400 entries. These entries can not be edited from the
system, but can be edited as a text-file.
Files accessible only by ‘ftp get /tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’ or ‘http://<IP-address of
system>/tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’:
site0.jpg
main.jpg
site1.jpg
duo.jpg
Snapshot of current stream if MultiSite.
Snapshot of selfview.
Snapshot of decoded stream if point-to-point.
Snapshot of the encoded stream if transmitting DuoVideo, the decoded stream if
receiving DuoVideo.
Custom logos
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Go to the folder where your logo is located.
Type “ftp <IP-address of your local system>”.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the logo, type "put <logo.jpg>".
The new logo will be displayed the next time you restart your system. Recommended maximum
size is: 704x576, file-format: jpg. If the file is too large, no logo will be displayed.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 7: Web Interface
Web Interface
It is possible to access and maintain the system remotely via a local area network (LAN) using a
standard Web-browser. Connect your system to a LAN with a Network cable.
How to configure your system for web interface:
1. Open Control Panel and choose Network\LAN Settings
2. Specify IP-assignment DHCP or Static. If DHCP is selected, no other settings are
needed. If Static is selected, IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be
specified.
3. Start your Web-browser. In the address field type the IP-address of the system. Enter the
password and the Web-page of the system will be shown. The default password is
TANDBERG.
4. Restart the system. Choose Restart from the Control Panel.
Example:
IP-assignment:
IP-address:
IP-subnet mask:
Gateway:
Static
196.9.200.129
255.255.255.0
196.9.200.21
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 8: Connecting the System
to PRI/T1
(Not available on all TANDBERG systems)
Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Using CSU adapter
Connecting the system to the ISDN network via the E1/T1-interface using an Adtran T1 ESF CSU
ACE or equivalent CSU, will allow up to 1.54 Mbps connection. The E1/T1-interface must be
connected to a CSU approved according to IEC 60950, UL 1950 or equivalent standard. The PRI-
line will run the AT&T 4ESS, 5ESS and National ISDN protocols in addition to Euro ISDN (E1).
Connecting to Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
Connect the PRI cable from the system to the input marked CPE (Customer Provided Equipment)
on the Adtran CSU (straight through category 5 cable is recommended). Connect to the network
via the NET connector on the Adtran CSU.
Configuration of the system
Open the Settings Menu from the Control Panel and select Network.
Choose Network Type: PRI and specify your PRI number, max. Channels, cable length (between
system and CSU) and switch type.
Configuration of Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
ƒ
ƒ
Enter 2)CONFIG menu using SCROLL and ENTER buttons.
Enter 3)TERMINAL menu. Check 1)FORMAT:ESF, 2)CODE: B8ZS , 3)SET LBO: 0-133
(corresponding to Cable Length setting on the system).
ƒ
ƒ
Go to Menu and enter 1)NETWORK menu. 7)SET LBO: 0.0 (according to information
from Telco).
Also, other network parameters should be set according to information from your Telco.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 9: Connecting the System
to the Switched 56 Network
Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Using Telesync TS-256 SW56/ISDN adapter
Connecting the system to the SW56 network using a Telesync Adapter is described below. There
are different Telesync Adapters for different configurations of SW56 networks. The network types
tested with the system are SW56 2Wire and 4Wire.
Connecting
Connect the system ISDN1 cable to the BRI S/T interface on the Telesync Adapter. Connect the
two SW56 cables from the Telesync adapter Line 1 and Line 2 to the SW56 network.
Configuration of the system
Select network type to National ISDN.
LINE 1 SETUP
NUMBER1:
NUMBER2:
SPID1:
program with number from the first SW56 line
program with number from the second SW56 line
program with number from the first SW56 line
Leave blank
SPID2:
How to call
It is important to use Restrict (56k). Select Restrict (56k) in Call Settings in the Call menu (select
the field next to the phone book button in the call menu). A second number field will appear when
ISDN is selected for Net within Call Settings and you choose bandwidth 128 kbps. Enter the
second number in the call settings menu.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 10: Connecting the System
to ISDN using NT1 Network Adapters
Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters
Connecting
Connect the first ISDN cable from ISDN 1 on the system to the S-interface on your first
NT1 network adapter. Connect the other ISDN cables to the appropriate NT1 network
adapters. Connect the U-interface of your NT1 adapter to the line provided from your
network provider.
For convenience the NT1 adapters could be placed inside the cabinet. If needed, use
the shorter ISDN cable (RJ45 connectors) delivered with the NT1 between the codec
and the NT1 and the longer ISDN cable between the NT1 and the connector (RJ45) at
the wall socket.
Configuring
The configuration of the system is performed in the same manner as described in
ISDN BRI Settings.
The NT1 should be powered up and you should check that the network is active.
Please check your NT1 User Manual.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
1. Extra Camera In
2. 12V DC Power In
3. HD Video Out, HDMI**
4. Codec – HD Video Out
5. Kensington Lock
NOTE! The enclosed TANDBERG Camera Cables must be used! Do not use other camera
cables as this might cause problems with the transfer of video signals from the Precision HD
Camera.
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):
This connector is used for the power, video and control signals to the main camera.
PRI
Pin-out
+12V (presence 2.8mA current source
when connected in daisy chain)
Pin-8
GND
Pin-7
Pin-6
Pin-5
Pin-4
Pin-3
Pin-2
Pin-1
TXD (out)
VIDEO LVDS -
VIDEO LVDS +
RXD (in)
GND
+ 12V
Power:
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.
PRI
Pin-out
Pin-6
Pin-5
Pin-4
Pin-3
Pin-2
Pin-1
GND
GND
RXD (in)
TXD (out)
Presence (+12V in daisy chain)
GND
Multiple Camera support:
The system is able to control a total of 4 cameras. Either 1 Precision HD Cameras plus up to 3
WAVE II Cameras, or up to 4 WAVE II -cameras. Optional the Precision HD Cameras and the
WAVE II cameras are supplied with the necessary cabling. In addition, an external power supply
for the camera is included.
You can connect both Precision HD Cameras and WAVE II cameras to the system. Camera
number one must be connected to video input 1 or to the HD input (data 2). Camera two must be
connected to video input 2. Camera number three must be connected to video input 3, and so
forth.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
The maximum length of the camera cable for multiple cameras supported by TANDBERG is 20 m
(65 ft).
* Applies to T3000 MXP Profile with new hardware.
** Disabled when connected to a TANDBERG system using the TANDBERG Camera Cable. This output does not support
HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
Precision HD Camera Dimensions:
Back view:
Side view:
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Top view:
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
(Not available with set top systems)
WAVE II Camera
Pinouts and Connectors
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):
This connector is used for the power and control signals to the main camera.
Pin-8
+12V (presence when connected in
daisy chain)
Pin-7
Pin-6
Pin-5
Pin-4
Pin-3
Pin-2
Pin-1
GND
GND
RXD (in)
TXD (out)
+12V
GND
+ 12V
Standard Phono:
Used for composite video signal
Power:
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)
Standard Mini Din:
Used for S-Video signal
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.
PRI
Pinout
Pin-6
GND
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Pin-5
Pin-4
Pin-3
Pin-2
GND
RXD (in)
TXD (out)
Presence (+12V in
daisy chain)
Pin-1
GND
Multiple Camera support:
The figure below is an example of how multiple cameras should be connected:
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Dimensions
Front view:
Side view:
Rear view:
Underside view:
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 12: Remote Control (TRC3 /
TRC4)
Remote Control (TRC 3 / TRC4)
The TANDBERG remote control transmits IR-signals using the following parameters:
Protocol
Siemens SDA2208
485kHz
Reference frequency
Address
4 & 7
IR wavelenght
IR carrier ferquency
940nm
30kHz
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Remote Control key code map:
Button
codes
Remote Control
(TRC 3)
Remote Control
(TRC 4)
TANDBERG TRACKER
Dec Hex
Address
Button name
Address
Button name
Address
Button name
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NUMBER 1
NUMBER 2
NUMBER 3
NUMBER 4
NUMBER 5
NUMBER 6
NUMBER 7
NUMBER 8
NUMBER 9
NUMBER 0
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NUMBER 1
NUMBER 2
NUMBER 3
NUMBER 4
NUMBER 5
NUMBER 6
NUMBER 7
NUMBER 8
NUMBER 9
NUMBER 0
*
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
#
#
PRESENTER
PRESENTER
0
0
0
0
ZOOM OUT
ZOOM IN
0
0
ZOOM OUT
ZOOM IN
0
VOLUME
DOWN
0
VOLUME
DOWN
26
27
28
29
30
31
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
0
0
VOLUME UP
MIC OFF
0
0
VOLUME UP
MIC OFF
0
0
0
UP
0
0
0
UP
DOWN
LEFT
DOWN
LEFT
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
32
33
34
35
36
20
21
22
23
24
0
0
0
0
0
RIGHT
OK
0
0
0
0
0
RIGHT
OK
CALL
CALL
END CALL
END CALL
PHONE
BOOK
PHONE
BOOK
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
25
XX
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
19
0
0
0
0
MENU
0
0
0
0
MENU
CANCEL
CANCEL
LAYOUT
LAYOUT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MAIN CAM
PC
DOC CAM
DVD
AUX
HELP
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
P0
P1
FAR END
PRESETS
SERVICES
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
0
3
3
WAKE UP
LOW BATT
PROG VER
0
3
3
WAKE UP
LOW BATT
PROG VER
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Appendix 13: Cisco CallManager
Registration
Cisco CallManager registration
Configuring an H.323 client on the CallManager 4.0
The registration of a H.323 client in CallManager is supported on the CallManager (CCM) 4.0
software and forward.
1. To configure the CallManager with an H.323 client, log on to the administration web
interface and go to the phone configuration page.
2. The Phone configuration page is located on: device (top menu) -> Add a New device ->
Phone -> H.323 Client.
3. In the phone configuration page type the IP address of the TANDBERG system in the
Device name field, select device pool and push the insert button.
4. A pop-up box will now appear on the screen and ask you if you would like to configure
the directory number. Push the ok button.
5. You should now see the Directory Number Configuration WEB page. Enter the
E.164/phone number of your TANDBERG system in the Directory number field, and in
the “Forward and Pickup Settings” enter the time of “No Answer Ring Duration”. The time
selected has to have a value from 1 to 300 seconds.
6. Push the Add button to update the CallManager with the directory number settings.
You have now configured the CallManager with a H.323 client and should be able to register the
TANDBERG system to it.When the TANDBERG system is registered to a CallManager, it will be
possible to place and receive calls from this system to any other video and voice systems that are
registered on the same CallManager.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 14: Diagnostics Tools for
IP
Diagnostic Tools for IP
To use these tools, will require using a PC and setting up a telnet session towards the system.
Q.931
To show Q.931 trace during a call you need to issue the command ‘syslog on’.One can get traces
for RAS, Q.931 and H.245 with this command. It is a complex trace and requires an extensive
knowledge in H.323 signalling to be understood.
Ping
Ping is used to see if the system is able to reach a specific IP-address, using a mechanism in IP
called ICMP. If the system is unable to register to its gatekeeper, or if it is unable to dial a specific
endpoint, one can use ping to see if there is at least an IP-route to the gatekeeper or to the
endpoint. In case you have problems, one would first ping the default gateway, then the
gatekeeper, and then the other endpoint.
Traceroute
Traceroute does exactly that; it traces the route an IP-packet takes to reach its destination and
displays all router hops. Traceroute is very useful for seeing exactly where there is a routing-
problem in the IP-network, and for checking where transport-delay is introduced.
Layer 4 Ports used in H.323 calls
The layer 4 ports used by the system in a H.323 call can be defined as follows:
ƒ
ƒ
Dynamic: The ports are allocated at random from 2048 to 65535.
Static: Will use the predefined layer 4 ports listed in the tables below.
Function
Port
1719
1720
Type
UDP
TCP
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS)
Q.931 Call Setup
H.245
Range 5555-5574
Range 2326-2341
Range 2326-2341
Range 2326-2341
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
Video
Audio
Data/FECC
Point-to-point + Duo Video
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Function
Port
1719
1720
Type
UDP
TCP
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS)
Q.931 Call Setup
H.245*
Range 5555-5574
Range 2326-2405
Range 2326-2405
Range 2326-2405
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
Video
Audio
Data/FECC
MultiSite + Duo Video
(*) Note: While using MultiSite, if a site is disconnected and reconnected without terminating the
entire conference, the next site to be connected will have a H.245 port outside of the specified
range. If this functionality is required through a firewall, the range of TCP ports can be extended
past 5564. However, if a site is disconnected and reconnected, without ending the conference
enough times one can quickly end up outside of this range again.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 15: System Upgrade
System Upgrade
Before starting the software upgrade of the TANDBERG MXP system, please make sure to have
the new software file, (for instance s050000F30.pkg) and the Release Key for this software
available. Your TANDBERG Partner will provide this for you.
All options and settings will automatically be stored when upgrading, so no backup is necessary.
If the system upgrade process is aborted before it's complete, the system will work as normal with
the original software
The TANDBERG MXP systems can be upgraded in three different ways;
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Using the web interface
Using FTP
Using ISDN
A) To upgrade using the the web interface, please do the following steps:
1. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that shall be upgraded (for instance
10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0.
2. The web interface of the codec will then be displayed. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on
top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Upgrade’.
The following page will now be displayed:
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Figure 1
3. Enter the Release key in the ‘Release Key’ field and press the ‘Install Software’ button.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
A new page will now be displayed:
Figure 2
4. Type in the path to where the new software file is stored, or select the file by using the ‘Browse’
button.
5. The progress for the sw upgrade can be tracked by pressing the ‘telnet’ link in the help text box
BEFORE pressing the install button. Please note that this is not a necessary action for a
successful software upgrade. An indication of the software upgrade progress will also be shown
on the display of the system
6. Press the ‘Install’ button to start the software upgrade.
When the software upgrade is complete, you need to click on the restart button and press OK to
restart the system in order to activate the new software. Once verified, the system will reboot
once more to complete the upload of all systems parameters kept from the old software revision.
7. To verify that the new sw is installed, refresh the page shown in figure1 after restart. The
‘Software Version’ should now show the new software version uploaded to the system. The same
information can also be found in the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System
Information’.
B) Upgrading using FTP:
1. Copy the new software file to a folder on your harddisk, for instance c:\software.
2. Open a DOS window, and go to the folder where the new software is stored.
3. Type ftp <ip address of the TANDBERG MXP system>.
4. Type in the supplied ‘Release Key’ as user.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
5. Type in your IP password (default is “TANDBERG”) as password.
6. Type ‘put <software file name> and press Enter. The new software file will now be
uploaded to the TANDBERG MXP system.
7. When the software upload is complete, end the ftp connection to the TANDBERG MXP
system by typing ‘bye’ in the DOS prompt.
8. To exit the DOS window completely, type ‘exit’
9. Restart the system to activate the new software.
C) ISDN Upgrade
The TANDBERG MXP systems has the possibility to be upgraded remotely from another
TANDBERG MXP system using ISDN. Please note that both systems must be on software
version F3.0 or newer for this functionality.
Please also note that both systems must be on software version F3.0 or newer for this
functionality
1. Connect to the system that shall be upgraded using ISDN
2. Copy the new software file to a folder on your computer, for instance c:\software.
3. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that the software upgrade is going to be
done from (for instance 10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0. The web
interface of the codec will then be displayed.
4. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Far end
upgrade’.
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
The following page will now be displayed:
Figure 3
5. Enter the release key for the system to be upgraded in the ‘Release Key’ field. If no release
key is given, the Far End System will use the previously stored release key if possible. This will
work when upgrading from a main release to a dot release.
6 Make sure the setting “Far End System Upgrade” is set to “On” at the remote site. This setting
can be found in the Control Panel/General/Permissions menu.
7. Enter the password set at the far end for remote upgrade (default password is “TANDBERG”)
8. Press ‘Install Software' .The system will now use about 90% of the call capacity to transfer the
software file across. During this time, audio and video will be turned off.
9. Once the software has been transferred and verified at the far end, you will get a new webpage
with information that the upgrade of the far end was successful. At the same time, a message box
will appear at the remote system asking if you want to reboot the system to activate the new
software.
10. To activate the new software. The ISDN connection needs to be closed, and the TANDBERG
MXP system must be rebooted.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
In the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System Information’, the installed software
should now be displayed as the ‘Software Version’.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 16: Declaration of
Conformity
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
MANUFACTURER:
PRODUCT NAME:
TYPE NUMBER:
DESCRIPTION:
TANDBERG Telecom AS
TANDBERG 7000MXP
TTC60-05
Video Conferencing Equipment
This product complies with Commission Directives:
•
•
•
LVD 73/23/EEC
EMC 89/336/EEC
R&TTE 99/5/EEC
This product complies with harmonised Standards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN 60950 : 1999
EN 55022 : 1994, A1/A2
EN 55024 : 1998
EN 61000-3-2 : 2000
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995, A1
TBR 3 Layer 1, 2 and 3
TBR 4 Layer 1, 2 and 3
TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION FILE NO.: D13144
YEAR WHICH THE CE-MARK WAS AFFIXED: 2003
For an official, signed version of this document, or details regarding documentation from the
technical construction file, please contact TANDBERG.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 18: Protocols Supported
PROTOCOLS SUPPORTED
TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
A set of networking protocols that provides connectivity over LAN/WAN to any network computer.
HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol
A protocol used to transfer information on the internet. A web-browser interface is used to access
the management computer. (Max number of simultaneous connections is unlimited, although only
one is processed at a time).
HTTPS - Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure sockets
If a Web server supports the SSL protocol (establish a secure communications channel to
prevent the interception of critical information), the Internet address for the server will begin with
https:// instead of http://
FTP - File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols used to copy files between two computers on the
Internet. FTP provides standard method for remote software upgrades. (Max. number of
simultaneous connection = 1).
TELNET
Telnet provides access to management functions by using a standard command-line interface.
(Max. number of simultaneous connection = 8, in addition to the RS232 connection).
TELNET Challenge
TMS (Tandberg Management Suite) uses MD5-Challenge Response algorithm (RFC-1321)
Telnet access for encryption of password over the IP network.
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
A standard network protocol for management and surveillance of TCP/IP networks (RFC 1157
SNMP v1, RFC 1213 MIB-II).
DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that offers dynamic IP addresses and other configuration parameters
(subnet mask) to network clients. It provides safe reliable and simple network configuration,
prevents address conflicts, and helps conserve the use of client IP addresses.
DNS - Domain Name System
A hierarchical distributed database that contains mappings of DNS domain names to various
types of data, such as IP addresses. DNS enables the location of computers and services by
user-friendly names, and it also enables the discovery of other information stored in the database.
Network Protocol – Is a set of rules and conventions for sending information over a
communications network. These rules govern the content, format, timing, sequencing, and error
control of messages exchanged among network devices.
LAN – Local Area Network
A communications network connecting a group of computers, printers, and other devices located
within a relatively limited area (for example, a building).
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
WAN – Wide Area Network
A communications network connecting geographically separated computers, printers, and other
devices.
SSL - Secure Sockets Layer
SSL is a proposed open standard for establishing a secure communications channel to prevent
the interception of critical information.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Appendix 19: Cable Specifications
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
External Network Pinout
With respect to signals on the NET port:
•
For balanced signals a “0”=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to
terminal B.
•
For unbalanced signals a “0”= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to
GND.
Pinout on 26-pin HD connector J5
Call control (menu
setting)
Standard
Mnemonics
Pin
Signal
dir.
Data
trig.
Manual
numb
Leased
line
V35
RS449
RS366
X21
RS366
1
GND
GND
GND
GND
Frame Ground (connected
to GND)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DPR
ACR
CRQ
PND
DLO
NB1
NB2
NB4
NB8
Output
Input
Output
Input
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Digit present
Abandon Call & Retry
Call Request
Present Next Digit
Data Line Occupied
Digit bit 1
Digit bit 2
Digit bit 3
Digit bit 4
Send Data / Transmit
Send Data / Transmit
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
10
11
12
SD (A)
SD (B)
SD (A)
SD (B)
T (A) Output
T (B) Output
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
13
14
15
RD (A)
RD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
SCR(A)
R(A)
R(B)
S(A)
Input
Input
Input
Receive Data
Receive Data
x
x
x
x
SCR
(A)
SCR
(B)
SCT
(A)
SCT
(B)
Signal Clock Receive /
Receive Timing
Signal Clock Receive /
Receive Timing
Signal Clock Transmit /
Send Timing
Signal Clock Transmit /
Send Timing
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
16
17
18
SCR(B)
SCT(A)
SCT(B)
S(B)
Input
Input
Input
19
20
21
22
GND
GND
TR (A)
TR (B)
RR (A)
GND
C(A) Output
C(B) Output
x
x
x
x
x
x
Terminal Ready / Control
Terminal Ready / Control
Received Line Signal
Detector / Carrier Detect /
Receiver Ready /
Indication
Received Line Signal
Detector / Carrier Detect /
Receiver Ready /
Indication
RLSD
(CD)
I (A)
Input
Input
Input
23
GND
(RLSD)
RR (B)
I (B)
x
x
24
RI
IC
Ring Indicator / Incoming
Call
x
25
26
LOS
DTR
LOS
Output
Output
x
x
x
x
Loss Of Signal
(Data) Terminal Ready
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Cable Specification
V.35 Cable
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
•
Connector on cable at Codec end:
Female 26 pin high-density DSUB with thumbscrews.
Connectors on cable at V.35-adapter end:
Male 34 pin Winchester (AMP part number 201357-1 or equivalent).
Cable length:
o
o
o
o
Maximum 20 meters (65 feet) for cables using DTR, RI, or RLSD.
Maximum 50 meters (170 feet) for cables not using DTR, RI or RLSD (data-triggered
applications).
•
•
Cable type:
o
Shielded.
Connector housing:
o
Metal, with cable shield connected to metal housing at 26 pin connector end.
Signal Name
Female
Male 34pin
Comments
26pin DSUB
Winchester
Pin number
Pin number
Frame ground
Signal ground
TX(A), transmit data
TX(B)
1
19,23
11
A
B
P
Twisted pair
12
S
RX(A), receive data
RX(B)
RCLK(A), rcv clock
RCLK(B)
TCLK(A), xmt clock
TCLK(B)
DTR
13
14
15
16
17
18
26
24
R
T
V
X
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Y
AA
H, C
L, J
F
RI
RLSD
22
Note:
For “Data-Triggered” leased-line applications, signals DTR, RI and RLSD are not used.
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Cable Specification
V.35/RS-366 Cable
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
Connector on cable at Codec end:
Female 26 pin high-density DSUB with thumbscrews.
Connectors on cable at V.35-adapter end:
o
o
o
Male 34 pin Winchester (AMP part number 201357-1 or equivalent) and
Male 25 pin DSUB with thumbscrews.
•
•
•
Cable length:
o
Maximum 20 meters (60 feet).
Cable type:
o
Shielded.
Connector housing:
o
Metal, with cable shield connected to metal housing at 26 pin connector end.
Signal Name
Female
26pin DSUB
Pin number
1
Male 34pin
Winchester
Pin number
A
Male
25pin
DSUB
Comments
Frame ground
Signal ground
19,23
B
TX(A), transmit data
TX(B)
RX(A), receive data
RX(B)
RCLK(A), rcv clock
RCLK(B)
TCLK(A), xmt clock
TCLK(B)
DTR
RI
RLSD
RS366 DPR
RS366 ACR
RS366 CRQ
RS366 PND
RS366 DLO
RS366 NB1
RS366 NB2
RS366 NB4
RS366 NB8
RS366 GND
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
26
24
22
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
S
R
T
V
X
Y
AA
H, C
L, J
F
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
2
3
4
5
22
14
15
16
17
7
8
9
10
19
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Cable Specification
RS-449 Cable
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
Connector on Tandberg End:
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent
Connector on RS-449:
o
DSUB 37 pin Male
Signal Name
Female
Male
Comments
26pin DSUB
(Tandberg end)
37pin DSUB
(DCE end)
Pin Number
Pin Number
Frame Ground
Signal Ground
Send Data (A)
1
1
19,30
4
Do not connect shield to FGND
Twisted Pair
19,23
11
Send Data (B)
Send Timing (A)
12
17
22
5
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Send Timing (B)
Receive Data (A)
18
13
23
6
Receive Data (B)
Receive Timing(A)
14
15
24
8
Receive Timing (B)
Terminal Ready(A)
Receiver Ready (A)
16
26
22
26
12
13
Twisted Pair
Receiver Ready (B)
Incoming Call (A)
LOS KG Resync
Cable Labels
23
24
31
15
25
36
NET 1
RS449
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Cable Specification
RS-449/RS-366 Cable
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
•
Connector on Tandberg End:
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent
Connector on RS-449:
o
DSUB 37 pin Male
Connector on RS-366:
DSUB 25 pin Male
o
Signal Name
Female
26pin DSUB
(Tandberg
end)
Male
Male
25pin DSUB
RS-366
Comments
37pin DSUB
(DCE end)
Pin Number
Pin Number
Pin Number
Do not connect shield to FGND
Frame Ground
Signal Ground
1
1
19
19,30
Send Data (A)
Send Data (B)
11
12
17
18
13
14
15
16
4
22
5
23
6
24
8
26
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Send Timing (A)
Send Timing (B)
Receive Data (A)
Receive Data (B)
Receive Timing(A)
Receive Timing (B)
Terminal Ready(A)
26
12
Receiver Ready (A)
Receiver Ready (B)
22
23
13
31
Twisted Pair
Incoming Call (A)
LOS A
24
25
2
15
36
LOS A Unbalanced
RS366 DPR
RS366 ACR
RS366 CRQ
RS366 PND
RS366 DLO
RS366 NB1
RS366 NB2
RS366 NB4
RS366 NB8
RS366 DSC
RS366 PWI
RS366 GND
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
22
14
15
16
17
13
6
7
8
9
10
20
20
1
7
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Cable Specification
RS-530 Cable
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
•
Connector on Tandberg End:
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent
Connector on RS-530:
o
DSUB 25 pin Male
Cable length:
o
1 meter
Signal Name
Female
Male
Comments
26pin DSUB
25pin DSUB
(Tandberg end) RS-530 (DCE end)
Pin Number
Pin Number
Do not connect shield to FGND
Frame Ground
Signal Ground
1
1
19
7
Send Data (A)
Send Data (B)
11
12
17
18
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
2
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
14
15
12
3
16
17
9
20
23
8
Send Timing (A)
Send Timing (B)
Receive Data (A)
Receive Data (B)
Receive Timing(A)
Receive Timing (B)
Terminal Ready(A)
Terminal Ready(B)
Receiver Ready (A)
Receiver Ready (B)
Twisted Pair
10
LOS A Unbalanced
LOS A
25
18
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Cable Specification
RS-530/RS-366
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
•
•
Connector on Tandberg End:
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent
Connector on RS-530:
o
DSUB 25 pin Male
Connector on RS-366:
DSUB 25 pin Male
Cable length:
o
o
1 meter
Signal Name
Female
26pin
DSUB
(Tandberg
end)
Male
25pin
DSUB
Male
25pin
DSUB
RS-366
Pin
Comments
RS-530
(DCE end)
Pin
Pin
Number
Number
Number
Do not connect shield to FGND
Frame Ground
Signal Ground
1
1
7
19
Send Data (A)
Send Data (B)
11
12
17
18
13
14
15
16
20
21
2
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
14
15
12
3
16
17
9
Send Timing (A)
Send Timing (B)
Receive Data (A)
Receive Data (B)
Receive Timing(A)
Receive Timing (B)
Terminal Ready(A)
Terminal Ready(B)
20
23
Twisted Pair
Receiver Ready (A)
Receiver Ready (B)
LOS A
22
23
25
2
8
10
18
Twisted Pair
LOS A Unbalanced
RS366 DPR
RS366 ACR
RS366 CRQ
RS366 PND
RS366 DLO
RS366 NB1
RS366 NB2
RS366 NB4
RS366 NB8
RS366 GND
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
22
14
15
16
17
7
7
8
9
10
1
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Cable Specification
RS-449 Cable to KIV-7
TANDBERG MXP and Classic Endpoints that support External
Network
•
•
Connector on Tandberg End:
o
Female 26pin High Density DSUB Newark P/N 50F2055 or Equivalent
Connector on RS-449:
o
DSUB 37 pin Male
Signal Name
Female
Male
Comments
26pin DSUB
(Tandberg end)
37pin DSUB
(DCE end)
Pin Number
Pin Number
Frame Ground
Send Data (A)
1
11
1
4
Do not connect shield to FGND
Twisted Pair
Send Data (B)
Send Timing (A)
12
17
14
15
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Send Timing (B)
Receive Data (A)
18
13
12
3
Receive Data (B)
Receive Timing(A)
14
15
16
17
Receive Timing (B)
LOS
16
25
19
9
31
Signal Ground
1
4,20,28
Jumpers
Jumpers
19,23,27
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
8 Glossary
#
199 AV1: External input for the TANDBERG/LOEWE monitor.
2nd monitor: The second monitor of your videoconferencing system. The second monitor is
normally placed on the right side of the first monitor.
4CIF: 4 times CIF, 704x576 pixels
4SIF: 4 times SIF, 704x480 pixels
A
AACLD: Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay
Access code: Use Access code to password protect outgoing calls.
Accessories box: The cabinet contains the following: W.A.V.E. camera, table microphone,
remote control and tracker and documentation.
Accessories drawer: See Accessories box
AES: Strong encryption. (Advanced Encryption Standard)
AGC: Automatic Gain Control. Maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will not
be amplified.
Alert speaker: The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor
may not be switched on.
Audio call: Audio call equals a telephone call. You can make a call with the video system with
audio only.
Audio input 4: Intended for connection to an external microphone amplifier or an external fixed
mixer.
Audio input 5: Intended for connection to external playback devices (or to telephone add-on
hybrids).
Audio input 6: Intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player or other external playback
devices.
Audio out 1: Intended for connection to TANDBERG Natural Audio, televisions or audio
amplifiers.
Audio out 2: Intended for connection to audio recording equipment (or to a telephone add-on
hybrid).
Audio out 3: Intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment.
Auto-display snapshot: Sent and received snapshot will automatically appear on full screen
display.
Auto answer: The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.
Automatic Duo Video: Duo Video Mode is put to Auto. When starting a presentation, Duo Video
will start automatically (if possible).
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
B
Bandwidth: Decides the quality of the video call. High bandwidth gives high quality.
C
Call Control Data Triggered: Uses TxData, RxData and clock signals only. Use Data Triggered
when no handshake signal is available.
Call control Leased Line: Is a non-dialing protocol and should be used when two systems are
connected in a point-to-point connection. Use Leased Line when the handshaking signals
DTR and CD are available.
Call control Manual: Should be used when no handshake signals are available, and the external
equipment requires a constantly connected line.
Call control RS366 Dialing: The only dialing protocol and would normally be used together with
network clocking RS449/V35 Compatible when the external system uses RS2366 ports.
Call status: Comprehensive information about the call listing transmitted and received
audio/video/data information.
Camera tracking: Voice Activated Camera Positioning - the camera will automatically view the
current speaker.
Camera tracking mode: Voice Activated Camera Positioning - the camera will automatically
view the current speaker.
Chair control: Enables one participant to control the meeting by selecting which of the
conference participants that is to be broadcasted to the other participants.
Channel status: Comprehensive information about the call progress listing the numbers called,
and if an error occurs a cause code is displayed.
CIF: Common Intermediate Format, 352x288 pixels
Closed Captioning: Text chat.
Codec: The Codec is the heart of the system. The main task for the Codec is the compression of
outgoing video, audio and data, the transmission of this information to the far end, and
the decompression of the incoming information.
Continuous Presence: See Split Screen
Control Panel: The Control Panel is found in the Menu.
CSU: Channel Service Unit
D
Daisy-chaining: Use of several cameras in a video conference.
Dataport: The system provides two standard RS 232 data ports to allow a computer to be
connected for data transfer and control purposes.
Dataport 1: A standard RS 232 data port to allow a computer to be connected for data transfer
and control purposes.
Dataport 2: Dedicated to the main camera and will not be available in standard configuration.
DES: Encryption. (Data Encryption Standard)
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Diagnostics: Allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system
settings.
Digital ClarityTF: Participants enjoy presentations of exceptionally high quality resolution video.
Disconnect site: As a Chairman, you get the option Disconnect site. Disconnect site allows you
to disconnect any participant in the conference.
Do Not Disturb: When Do Not Disturb is active the system will not accept any incoming calls.
The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the unit.
Document Camera: A document camera is an additional camera that is used for showing text,
diagrams as well as physical objects.
DownspeedingTF: If channels are dropped during a videoconferencing session, the connection
is automatically maintained without interruption.
dual monitor: The second monitor
Dual monitor system: A videoconference system with two monitors.
Duo VideoTF: Allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a presenter on one
screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.
E
E.164 Alias: The E.164 address of the system. Equivalent to a telephone number, sometimes
combined with access codes. The system will not register with the gatekeeper if the E164
alias is not set.
E1: Network type, 30 channels. Default for PAL versions.
Echo canceller: Continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment.
Echo control: When set to On the far end is prevented to hear their own audio.
Encryption: Use encryption to make a secure call. The system will try to make point-to-point
calls using encryption. If the far end system supports encryption, the call will be
encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption. (Auto encryption). Set
encryption to On if you don't want an unencrypted call to be established at all. Set
encryption to Off if you don't want to use encryption.
End view: Stop viewing the site previously chosen with View Site, and return the view to the site
that is currently On Air. Can be used by all conference participants.
Ethernet Speed: The speed (Mbps) on the connection from the system to the LAN.
F
Fallback to telephony: Enables fallback from video calls to telephony/speech calls.
Far End: In a video conference, Far End means the remote side of the conference. Far End
Camera is your conference partner's camera. Opposite to Near End
FECC: Far End Camera Control. When activated it is possible to control the far end's camera,
select video sources, activate presets and request still images.
Floor: In a multipoint call, use Request Floor to broadcast your picture to all other participants.
This is handy when you are having presentations, for teachers etc.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
G
G.711: Audio algorithm for normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz) The system will
always have G.711 enabled.
G.722: Audio algorithm for high quality audio (7 kHz).
G.722.1: Audio algorithm for compressed high quality audio (7 kHz)
G.728: Audio algorithm for compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz)
Gateway: The gateway enables sites on IP and sites on ISDN to participate in meetings with
each other.
Global Phone Book: A phone book provided by TMS.
H
H.261: Video algorithm for legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always
transmit H.261
H.263: Video algorithm for normal video compression and decompression
H.264: Video algorithm for bandwidth-efficient video compression and decompression
Hardware serial number: A unique number (listed in the System Information menu) to identify
your system towards your TANDBERG representatives.
Humfilter: A highpass filter which reduces very low frequency noise.
I
iCIF: Interlaced CIF, 352x288 pixels, 50 fields per second
Incoming call: Someone calls in to your system
Incoming MCU Calls: If occupied in a call, the system will provide a visual/audio indication of an
incoming call and ask to accept or reject the call.
IP address: Defines the network address of the system. This address is only used in static mode.
IP assignment: IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are assigned by the DHCP server.
IP assignment Static: The system's IP-address and IP-subnet mask must be specified in the IP-
address field.
IP Precedence: Used to define which priority the system should have in the network. Higher
numbers indicate higher priority.
IP subnet mask: Defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode.
IP TOS: IP Type Of Service. Helps a router select a router path when multiple paths are
available.
iSIF: Interlaced SIF, 352x240 pixels, 60 fields per second
L
Layout: Use the Layout key to change picture layout on the screen.
M
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Main Camera: Your camera. Video input 1
Max call length: This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the
call time exceeds the length specified.
Max channels: Indicates the maximum number of channels the system is allowed to use on the
E1/T1 interface.
MCU: Multipoint Conference Unit.
MCU status line: Shows indicators for MultiSite, MCU and DuoVideo
MicOff: Microphone is switched off.
Mix mode: How to adjust the weighting of each microphone to obtain the best possible audio and
minimize the background noise.
Modem mode: (Dataport) Supports external control of the system via a PC as in Control Mode.
Once a call is established, Dataport 1 will automatically switch to Data mode. When the
call disconnects, Dataport 1 switches back to Control Mode.
MSN: Multiple Subscriber Number. Possible to attach different ISDN terminals, with different
numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. The service can be ordered from the
telephone company.
multipoint call: A call with more than two participants including yourself
MultiSite: The TANDBERG systems internal MCU. Built-in system which makes it possible to
establish meetings with up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls. The MultiSite option is
not available on all systems.
MultiSite cascading: By connecting up to 4 or 6 (depending on the system capacity) MultiSite
systems together to achieve a higher number of participants in a multipoint call.
N
NAT: Network Address Translation. NAT support in the videoconferencing system enables proper
exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external videoconferencing system
when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router. Used in small LANs, often home offices,
when a PC and a videoconferencing system is connected to a router with NAT support.
NAT Address: The external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to
the router will then be routed to the system's IP address.
Natural Audio ModuleTM: Designed to improve audio quality during a videoconference. It is
mounted in the cabinet above the Codec and consists of an audio system optimized for
speech.
Natural Presenter Package: Consists of Duo Video, Digital Clarity and PC Presenter.
Natural VideoTF: 60 fields per second true interlaced picture.
Near End: In a video conference, Near End means your own side of the conference. Near
Camera is your own camera. Opposite to Far End
Network clocking: Specifies the number of physical external clock signals.
Network Interface: Indicates if the network is of type E1 or T1.
Network profiles: It is possible to define up to 6 network profiles, each consisting of name and
call prefix, and 3 of them also include network selection.
Non Standard Facility: The network provider may require service selection in your ISDN
configuration. Valid NSF codes are from 1 to 31. 0 will disable NSF service codes.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
NR: Noise Reduction. Reduces constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning
systems, cooling fans, etc.).
NSF: Non Standard Facility.
NTSC: National Television System Committee. Video standard corresponding to 4SIF. Primary
used in USA, Japan and other countries.
O
Option Key: Required by the system to activate optional features such as MultiSite and
Presenter.
P
PAL: Phase Alternation by Line. Video standard corresponding to 4CIF. Primary used in Europe,
Middle East and Asia
Parallel dial: Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a bonding call.
PC PresenterTF: An easily accessible PC connection plug. When connected the PC image is
displayed on the monitor.
PC SoftPresenterTF: Shows PC images via the LAN connection.
PIP: Picture-In-Picture
point-to-point call: A call with two participants including your self
POP: Picture Outside Picture. POP is a picture layout mode that is optimized for wide screens:
Full screen, 1+3 layout and emulated dual monitor layout.
Precision HD Camera: High Definition camera – delivers high resolution quality video.
Presentation: Presentation means to show another video source. Use the Presentation Key for a
predefined presentation source. Use the presentation menu to choose among all
available video sources.
Presentation source: The video source that is on display when you press the Presentation Key
on the remote control
Presets: Predefined camera positions (and video sources)
Q
QCIF: Quarter CIF, 176x144 pixels
QSIF: Quarter SIF, 176x120 pixels
R
Release Floor: To end the request floor function.
release floor to site: Allows the chairman to release the floor.
Remote: Short for Remote Control
Request Floor: The MCU will broadcast the video in full screen to all other participants in the
conference. If the MCU conference has a chairman, a request will be sent to the the
chairman.
Restart: Restarts the system.
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Restore defaults: Restores system settings to the factory defaults.
Restricted call: A call to a 56 kbps network. By default the system will dial an unrestricted call (a
call to a 64 kbps network) and downspeed to 56 kbps if necessary.
S
S-VHS: S-video
S-video: The standard camera uses one of the S-video inputs in the codec.
Selfview: Outgoing video. In most cases, the image of your self.
Serial number: A unique number (the hardware serial number, listed in the System Information
menu) to identify your system towards your TANDBERG representatives.
Side-by-Side: Side-by-side view means that two pictures are displayed side by side each other
on the screen. You will se two equally sized pictures.
SIF: Standard Input Format, 352x240 pixels
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNMP Community: SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP
requests must have a password in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in
the system. The SNMP Community name is case sensitive.
SNMP Trap Host: Identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager.
SNMP traps: Generated by the agent to inform the manager about important events.
SoftMux: Ensures high reliability and includes the unique Downspeeding feature. It also makes it
possible to dial to another videoconferencing equipment, phones and mobile phones in a
uniform way, and provides an on-screen, real-time feedback on the progress of a call.
Split Screen: All the participants in a MultiSite conference are displayed on the screen. (Former
Continuous Presence)
Start Channel: Indicates the firstE1/T1 channel the system is allowed to use. The setting might
be used when if the E1/T1 line is shared with other equipment.
Start up video source: The video source that is on display when the system wakes up from
standby mode.
Status Format: Provides call quality feedback on the status line.
Streaming: Allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network.
Streaming Address: Defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming server or a
multicast address.
Streaming Address Port: If several codecs are streaming to the same IP-address, different
ports have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.
Streaming Allow remote Start: Streaming can be started from the Videoconferencing system
using the remote control, by using the Data port, or from external user interfaces like the
Web-browser or Telnet session.
Streaming Announcements: The system will announce to the network that it is streaming. This
enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC) to connect to the system's streaming session.
Used by Cisco IP/TV.
Streaming Password: Prevents unauthorized access to the streaming functionality.
Streaming Source: Select between local video and/or far end video to be streamed. Local and
far end audio is always streamed.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Streaming TTL/Router Hops: Used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data should
pass before it is rejected.
Streaming Video Rate: Defines the Video streaming rate from the system.
SVGA: Super VGA. (800x600)
SXGA: Super extended Graphics Array (1280x1024)
System information: Lists system numbers, line status, software version and other useful
information.
System name: Identifies a videoconferencing system
T
T1: Network type, 24 channels. Default for NTSC versions.
T1 Line Coding: Indicates how the signals on the line should be coded. If parts of the systems
use restricted coding, this should be selected.
Take chair: Request chairmanship of the conference. If no one else is chairman, the request is
granted.
TCS-4: Used to address different systems on a LAN when dialing in via a gateway.
Terminal Names: Lists the site numbers or name (if supported) of other sites connected in the
conference.
Terminate meeting: The chairman can terminate the conference, i.e. all participants are
disconnected.
TMS: TANDBERG Management Suite
Touch Tones: To dial extension numbers etc. during a call, use touch tones in order to get tones
instead of preset on the number keys.
Tracker: The tracker is a small infrared remote control device made to steer the camera to any
desired location within the room.
TSC-1: TCS-1 is used for H243 password on H320 MCU's
V
VCR: Video Cassette Recorder
VGA: Video Graphics Array. (640 x 480)
VGA Out Quality: Changes the resolution of the VGA signal available in the VGA Out connector
at the rear of the codec.
View Settings: Displays all the system settings in a read only format.
View site: View any participant in the conference other than the participant currently On Air. Can
be used by all conference participants.
VNC: Virtual Network Computing.
Voice Switched: The active site will be displayed in full screen during a MultiSite conference.
W
WAVE II Camera: Wide Angle View Camera - delivers the widest angle of view in the industry.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Welcome menu: The welcome menu displays the Menu when you are outside a call.
X
XGA: extended Graphics Array (1024 x 768)
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
9 Index
A
F
Access Code....................................100, 123
Additional microphone.............................244
Administrator Password...........................139
Alert Speaker...........................................182
Alert Tones and Volume..........................182
Allowance ................................................123
Answer an incoming Call...........................48
Assign Floor to Participant.........................90
Audio
Inputs ...................................................172
Outputs.................................................176
Audio Algorithm .......................................161
Audio Demo.............................................113
Audio Leveling (AGC)..............................181
AudioScience microphone.......................244
Auto answer.............................................120
Auto BRI Config.......................................199
Auto-Display Snapshot............................155
Automatic Camera Tracking......................74
B
Far End Camera Control........................... 69
Far End Control......................................... 70
G
Gatekeeper ............................................. 213
Group Layout ............................................ 87
H
H.239 ................................ 80, 150, 151, 153
H.331 Settings ........................................ 207
Hardware serial number ......................... 100
I
Indicators .................................................. 35
Interfaces ................................................ 230
IP Address Conflict Check...................... 110
IP Settings............................................... 211
ISDN BRI Settings .................................. 199
ISDN PRI Settings .................................. 201
ISDN Settings ......................................... 198
L
Language................................................ 117
Last number dialed ................................... 55
Layout ....................................................... 29
Leased E1/T1 Settings ........................... 204
Letter keys ................................................ 32
M
MCU.......................................................... 94
MCU Status Line..................................... 186
Menu timeout in call................................ 135
Mic off ....................................................... 30
Microphone ......................................... 5, 244
Missed calls .............................................. 55
MultiSite .................................................... 94
MultiSite (Built-in)...................................... 94
N
Natural Video .......................................... 163
Navigation................................................. 26
Network Profiles...................................... 226
Number keys............................................. 32
P
PC Presenter ............................................ 78
PC Soft Presenter..................................... 79
PC SoftPresenter...................................... 79
Permissions ............................................ 123
Phone Book
Battery handling.......................................... vi
C
Call history.................................................55
Call Settings...............................................43
Call Status ...............................................103
Camera Presets.........................................71
Camera Tracking Mode...........................185
Codec ..........................................................5
Connecting cables.....................................15
Contact us....................................................x
D
Default Call Settings................................168
Digital Clarity............................................165
Disconnect Participant...............................92
Display snapshot .................................81, 82
Do Not Disturb ...........................................53
Document camera ...................................241
Dual Monitor ............................................253
Dual Stream...................... 80, 150, 151, 153
Dual Video Stream ........... 80, 150, 151, 153
Duo Video......................... 80, 150, 151, 153
Duo Video Quality....................................165
E
Echo Control............................................178
EDID ........................................................257
Encryption................................................193
End Call .....................................................49
External Network Configuration...............205
External Network Settings .......................198
Extra cameras..........................................243
Delete.................................................... 63
Edit ........................................................ 62
MultiSite................................................. 60
New ....................................................... 59
Picture Control .......................................... 73
PIP Appearance...................................... 156
PIP Placing ............................................. 156
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TANDBERG 7000 MXP
Postpone 1 hour ........................................51
Postpone 3 hours.......................................52
Precision HD Camera..............................277
Presentation
Presentation Key............................76, 153
Presentation Menu.................................77
Presentation Source................................153
Presets.......................................................71
Production of products................................ vi
R
Release Chair............................................89
Release Floor ............................................86
Release Floor from Participant..................90
Request Floor ............................................86
Restart .....................................................114
Restore defaults.......................................228
S
Screen Settings .......................................125
Search .......................................................66
Selfview .....................................................27
SIP...........................................................218
Snapshot..............................................81, 82
Snapshot Source.....................................154
Software Options.....................................131
Start up Video Source .............................152
Stereo I/O mode ......................................179
Stereo speakers.......................................179
Streaming ..................................................45
System configuration.................................17
System Information..................................100
System Name ..........................................118
T
Take Chair ................................................ 89
Take new snapshot............................. 81, 82
Telephone Add-On.................................. 252
Telephone Call.......................................... 42
Terminate Meeting.................................... 93
Test Subsystem ...................................... 104
Text Chat ................................................ 113
Timeout................................................... 135
To connect a PC to Dataport 1 ............... 227
Touch Tones............................................. 33
U
User Guide.............................................. 115
V
Video Algorithm....................................... 160
Video Call.................................................. 40
Video cassette recorder (VCR)............... 242
Video Name ............................................ 191
Video Quality........................................... 165
View Administrator Settings.................... 105
View Site................................................... 91
VNC Settings .......................................... 157
Volume + and - ......................................... 31
W
Warnings................................................. 111
Waste handling ...........................................vi
WAVE II camera ................................. 5, 277
Web Snapshots....................................... 188
Welcome menu....................................... 146
Welcome Screen....................................... 21
X
XGA ........................................................ 125
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Sharp MP3 Docking Station DK CL8PHBK User Manual
Soleus Air Beverage Dispenser JC 128 User Manual
Sony Computer Drive USM128B User Manual
Sony Flat Panel Television 4 106 868 131 User Manual
Sony Security Camera YS W130 User Manual
Sony Webcam DSC RX100M2 User Manual
SRS Labs Musical Instrument Amplifier SR550 552 User Manual
Sub Zero Refrigerator Undercounter Refrigeration User Manual
Tanaka Chainsaw ECV 4501 User Manual
TANDBERG Stereo System 8000 MXP User Manual